Paradyne Computer Monitor 9820 2M User Manual

FrameSaverr SLV  
MODELS 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M, and 9820-45M  
USER’S GUIDE  
Document No. 9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
About This Guide  
H
H
H
H
Purpose and Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Document Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Product-Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi  
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii  
1
2
About FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitors  
H
H
SLM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitor Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
User Interface and Basic Operation  
H
H
H
H
Logging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Screen Work Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Navigating the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Keyboard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Selecting from a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Switching Between Screen Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Selecting a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
3
Configuration Procedures  
H
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Configuration Option Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Changing Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Saving Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
Configuration Options  
H
H
H
Configuring Using the Easy Install Screen (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Setting Up for Trap Dial-Out (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) . . . . . . . 4-5  
Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Setting Up Auto-Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Automatically Removing a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Setting Up Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site . . . . . . . 4-11  
Setting Up Back-to-Back Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Changing Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Configuration Option Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Configuring the Overall System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
Configuring Service Level Verification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Configuring General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Configuring the Physical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Configuring the Network Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Configuring the User Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Manually Configuring DLCI Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Configuring PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
Setting Up Management and Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Configuring Node IP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Configuring Management PVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36  
Configuring General SNMP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41  
Configuring SNMP NMS Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45  
Configuring the Ethernet Port (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50  
Configuring the Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57  
Configuring the Modem Port (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5
Security and Logins  
H
H
H
Limiting Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Controlling External COM Port Device Access (Models 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
H
H
Controlling Modem Port Device Access (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Limiting Telnet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Limiting FTP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link . . . . . 5-7  
Controlling SNMP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Disabling SNMP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Creating a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Modifying a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Deleting a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
H
H
H
H
6
Monitoring  
H
H
Displaying System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Front Panel Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Displaying LEDs and Control Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
H
Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen (Models 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . 6-8  
Power Module LEDs (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Device Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16  
System and Test Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21  
PVC Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23  
Network Interface Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
IP Routing Table (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28  
Clearing Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29  
Service Level Verification Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30  
DLCI Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32  
Frame Relay Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34  
Ethernet Performance Statistics (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37  
Trap Event Log (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7
8
FTP Operation  
H
FTP File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Upgrading System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Determining Whether a Download Is Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Changing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Transferring Collected Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Troubleshooting  
H
H
Problem Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit . . . . . 8-4  
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface . . . 8-6  
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
Troubleshooting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Frame Relay PVC Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Tests Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
Test Timeout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
Starting and Stopping a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Aborting All Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16  
PVC Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
Network or Port (Internal) PVC Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
Send Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
Monitor Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19  
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19  
Physical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
DTE Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
IP Ping Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21  
Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
9
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices  
H
H
H
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
H
H
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2  
Configuring NetScout Manager Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus  
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Verifying Domains and Groups (Models 9820 and 9820-2M) . . . . . . 10-5  
Correcting Domains and Groups (Models 9820 and 9820-2M) . . . . . 10-6  
Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Editing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Adding SLV Alarms Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11  
Creating History Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Installing the User-Defined History Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15  
Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16  
H
H
Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus (Models 9820 and  
9820-2M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19  
H
Statistical Windows Supported (Models 9820 and 9820-2M) . . . . . . . . . . 10-20  
11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
H
H
H
H
H
Installation and Setup of Network Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Discovering FrameSaver Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Configuring the Discovered Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Grouping Elements for Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5  
Generating Reports for a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
About Service Level Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
About At-a-Glance Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
About Trend Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7  
Printed Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7  
Reports Applicable to SLV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7  
H
12 Hardware Maintenance (9820-45M)  
H
H
H
H
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1  
Cleaning the Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2  
Replacing the Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3  
Replacing a Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
A Menu Hierarchy  
H
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
B SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
H
H
H
MIB Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
System Group (mib-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Interfaces Group (mib-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Trap: warmStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Trap: authenticationFailure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Traps: linkUp and linkDown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Traps: enterprise-Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
Traps: RMON-Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14  
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15  
Network Synchronous Port Physical Interface Alarm Defaults . . . . . B-16  
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19  
DLCI Alarm Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21  
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23  
H
H
H
H
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
C Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
H
H
Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
COM (Terminal) Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
LAN Adapter Converter and Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Standard EIA-232 Crossover Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
H
User and Network Data Port Connectors  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6  
X.21 Network Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . C-7  
X.21 DTE Adapter Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) . . . . . . C-8  
V.35 Network Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . C-9  
V.35 DTE Adapter (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11  
EIA-530-A Straight-through Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13  
H
H
H
EIA-612/613 HSSI Connectors (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15  
LAN Connector (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16  
Modem Connector (Model 9820-45M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16  
D Technical Specifications  
E Equipment List  
H
H
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1  
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Guide  
Purpose and Intended Audience  
This document contains information needed to properly set up, configure, and  
verify operation of FrameSaver SLV in-line monitors. It is intended for system  
designers, engineers, administrators, and operators.  
Document Organization  
Section  
Description  
Chapter 1  
About FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitors. Identifies how  
FrameSaver SLV in-line monitors fit into Paradyne’s SLM  
solution, and describes the features of these units.  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 4  
Chapter 5  
Chapter 6  
User Interface and Basic Operation. Shows how to  
navigate the user interface.  
Configuration Procedures. Shows how to access and save  
configuration options.  
Configuration Options. Describes the configuration options  
available on the units.  
Security and Logins. Shows how to control access to the  
FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins.  
Monitoring. Shows how to display unit identification  
information and perform file transfers, as well as how to  
display and interpret status and statistical information.  
Chapter 7  
Chapter 8  
FTP Operation. Shows how to use File Transfer Protocol to  
upgrade system software and transfer collected data.  
Troubleshooting. Provides device problem resolution,  
alarm, and other information, as well as troubleshooting  
and test procedures.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About This Guide  
Section  
Description  
Chapter 9  
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices. Identifies  
where installation and setup information is located and how  
FrameSaver units are supported.  
Chapter 10  
Chapter 11  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver  
Devices. Describes setup of the NetScout Manager Plus  
application so it supports FrameSaver units.  
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices.  
Describes setup of Concord’s Network Health application  
so reports can be created for FrameSaver units, and  
identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units.  
Chapter 12  
Hardware Maintenance (9820-45M). Describes  
maintenance of the 9820-45M, including replacement of  
the front panel assembly and power modules.  
Appendix A  
Appendix B  
Menu Hierarchy. Contains a graphical representation of  
how the user interface screens are organized.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults.  
Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be  
downloaded, describes the unit’s compliance with SNMP  
format standards and with its special operational trap  
features, and describes the RMON-specific user history  
groups, and alarm and event defaults.  
Appendix C  
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments. Shows the  
rear panel, tells what cables are needed, and provides pin  
assignments for interfaces and cables.  
Appendix D  
Appendix E  
Index  
Technical Specifications.  
Equipment List.  
Lists key terms, acronyms, concepts, and sections.  
A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is  
available on the World Wide Web at www.paradyne.com. Select Library  
Technical Manuals Technical Glossary.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About This Guide  
Product-Related Documents  
Document Number  
Document Title  
Paradyne FrameSaver Documentation:  
9820-A2-GL10  
9820-A2-GN10  
9820-A2-GN11  
FrameSaver SLV, Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M,  
and 9820-45M, Quick Reference  
FrameSaver SLV, Models 9820, 9820-2M, and  
9820-8M, Installation Instructions  
FrameSaver SLV, Model 9820-45M,  
Installation Instructions  
Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation:  
7800-A2-GZ41  
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for UNIX  
Quick Start Installation Instructions  
7800-A2-GZ42  
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for  
Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions  
NetScout Documentation:  
2930-170  
NetScout Probe User Guide  
2930-610  
NetScout Manager/Plus User Guide  
2930-620  
NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server  
Administrator Guide  
2930-788  
NetScout Manager Plus Set Up & Installation Guide  
Concord Communications Documentation:  
09-10010-005  
09-10020-005  
09-10050-002  
09-10070-001  
Network Health User Guide  
Network Health Installation Guide  
Network Health – Traffic Accountant Reports Guide  
Network Health Reports Guide  
Contact your sales or service representative to order product documentation.  
Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at  
www.paradyne.com. Select Library Technical Manuals.  
To order a paper copy of this manual:  
H
H
Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-PARADYNE (1-800-727-2396)  
Outside the U.S.A., call 1-727-530-8623  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About This Guide  
Conventions Used  
Convention Used  
When Used  
Italic  
To indicate variable information (e.g.,  
DLCI nnnn).  
Menu selection sequence  
To provide an abbreviated method for indicating  
the selections to be made from a menu or  
selections from within a menu before  
performing a procedural step.  
For example,  
Main Menu Status System and Test Status  
indicates that you should select Status from  
the Main Menu, then select System and Test  
Status.  
(Path:)  
To provide a check point that coincides with the  
menu path shown at the top of the screen.  
Always shown within parentheses so you can  
verify that you are referencing the correct table  
(e.g., Path: main/config/alarm).  
Brackets [ ]  
To indicate multiple selection choices when  
multiple options can be displayed (e.g., Clear  
[Network/Port-1] Statistics).  
Text highlighted in red  
To indicate a hyperlink to additional information  
when viewing this manual online. Click on the  
highlighted text.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FrameSaver SLV  
In-Line Monitors  
1
This chapter includes the following:  
H
SLM Overview  
FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitor Features  
H
SLM Overview  
The Service Level Management (SLM) Solution consists of:  
H
H
H
FrameSaverr SLV units  
OpenLanet SLM system  
Standalone NetScout Probes and NetScout Manager Plus application  
(optional)  
FrameSaver SLV (Service Level Verifier) in-line monitors add superior diagnostic  
capability, end-to-end visibility, accurate network performance reporting, and SLM  
intelligence to any frame relay network connection, regardless of the access  
device being used. FrameSaver SLV in-line monitors provide a global,  
multinational SLM solution that can be installed between a DTE (such as a router)  
and any type of network access device, such as a network termination unit  
(NTU), a T1/E1 inverse multiplexer, any DSU/CSU, a Digital Subscriber Line  
(DSL) endpoint, or an ATM IMA device or ATM Integrated Access Device with  
frame relay interworking.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitors  
The following illustration shows a network that includes FrameSaver units at the  
central site and remote sites. User data PVCs provide LAN-to-LAN connectivity  
between the central site and the remote sites.  
Network  
Operations  
Center  
Branch Office A  
NMS  
Frame  
Relay  
Router  
For NOC  
Management  
Remote Site  
FrameSaver  
Unit  
Frame  
Relay  
Router  
Corporate  
Headquarters  
NET Port  
100  
Inverse  
Multiplexer  
or NTU  
Frame  
Relay  
DLCI/EDLCIs:  
Router  
100/0 User Data  
100/2 Management Data  
Frame  
Relay  
NET  
Port  
Fr  
ameSa  
ve  
TM  
r
SL  
V
Network  
Frame  
Remote Site  
FrameSaver  
Unit  
Relay  
Central Site  
FrameSaver  
Unit  
For Local  
Management  
Router  
200  
NET Port  
DLCI/EDLCIs:  
100/0 User Data for Branch Office A  
200/0 User Data for Branch Office B  
100/2 Management Data for Branch Office A  
200/2 Management Data for Branch Office B  
DLCI/EDLCIs:  
200/0 User Data  
200/2 Management Data  
Branch Office B  
Multiplexed PVC  
Dedicated Management PVC (Non-multiplexed)  
00-16787  
The central site FrameSaver unit ordinarily is configured for management from a  
Network Management System (NMS), through either the attached router, as  
shown in the above figure, or through the Network Operations Center (NOC)  
router (for management by the Network Service Provider). Multiple management  
PVCs then connect the central site unit to the remote site units using Paradyne’s  
proprietary PVC multiplexing method (embedded DLCIs).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitors  
FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitor Features  
The FrameSaver SLV in-line monitor provides the following features:  
H
Intelligent Service Level Verification. Provides accurate throughput,  
latency, and availability measurements to determine network performance  
and whether service level agreements (SLAs) are being met, along with SLA  
reporting. SLA parameter thresholds can be configured to provide proactive  
notification of a developing network problem.  
H
H
Security. Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access  
to the unit.  
TruePutt Technology. Using Frame Delivery Ratios (FDR) and Data  
Delivery Ratios (DDR), throughput (within and above CIR, as well as between  
CIR and EIR, and above EIR) can be measured precisely, eliminating  
inaccuracies due to averaging. These ratios are available through OpenLane  
SLV reports.  
H
Frame Relay Aware Management. Supports diagnostic and network  
management features over the frame relay network using the Annex-A,  
Annex-D, and Standard UNI (User Network Interface) LMI management  
protocol. The unit’s frame relay capability also supports:  
— Inband management channels over the frame relay network using  
dedicated PVCs.  
— Unique nondisruptive diagnostics.  
— CIR monitoring on a PVC basis.  
— Multiple PVCs on an interface.  
— Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs.  
— Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single  
network PVC.  
H
Auto-Configuration. Provides the following automatic configuration features:  
— Frame Relay Discovery – For automatic discovery of network DLCIs and  
configuration of a user data port DLCI, the PVC connection, and a  
management PVC, which is multiplexed with user data DLCIs.  
— LMI Protocol Discovery – For automatic configuration of the protocol  
being used by the network.  
— DLCI Deletion – For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCIs  
from the unit’s configuration and statistical databases.  
— CIR Determination – For automatic recalculation of the committed rate  
measurement interval (Tc) and excess burst size (Be) when a DLCI’s CIR  
changes.  
Excess burst size (Be) and committed burst size (Bc) are recalculated  
when Committed Burst Size Bc (Bits) is set to CIR. The committed rate  
measurement interval (Tc) is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc  
(Bits) is set to Other.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitors  
H
RMON-Based User History Statistics Gathering. Provides everything  
needed to monitor network service levels, plus throughput with accurate data  
delivery, network latency, and LMI and PVC availability.  
In addition, port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links. These  
statistics are available real-time via the Enterprise MIB and historically as an  
RMON2 User History object. In future releases of the OpenLane SLM  
system, this will enable even more accurate calculations of utilization.  
H
H
Network User History Synchronization. Allows correlation of RMON2 User  
History statistics among all SLV devices in a network for more accurate  
OpenLane SLV reports. Using a central clock, called the network reference  
time, all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the  
network, further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports.  
Extensive Testing Capability. Provides a variety of tests to identify  
and diagnose device, network, and other problems. These tests can be  
commanded from the unit’s menu-driven user interface or the OpenLane  
system (using its easy-to-use Diagnostic Troubleshooting feature).  
H
H
Dedicated Troubleshooting PVC. Provides a troubleshooting management  
link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network. This  
feature can be configured from the menu-driven user interface.  
Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported.  
FrameSaver  
SLV 9820  
FrameSaver  
SLV 9820-2M SLV 9820-8M SLV 9820-45M  
FrameSaver  
FrameSaver  
Feature  
Through  
Connections  
(PVCs)  
16  
120  
2
250  
2
512  
2
Dedicated  
Management  
PVCs  
2
H
H
Router-Independence. Unique diagnostics, performance monitoring,  
PVC-based in-band network management, and SNMP connectivity is not  
dependent upon external routers, cables, or LAN adapters.  
Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support. Provides Inverse ARP (Address  
Resolution Protocol) support so the frame relay router at one end of a  
management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the  
other end of the PVC. Standard RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows the  
router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to  
that FrameSaver unit.  
H
LMI Packet Capture. Provides a way to upload data that has been captured  
in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network  
Associates Sniffer for analysis, or viewed via the menu-driven user interface.  
The 12 most recent LMI messages can be displayed from the menu-driven  
user interface.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitors  
H
ATM VPI/VCI and DLCI Correlation. For networks with both ATM and frame  
relay-access endpoints, allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating  
Virtual Path or Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) in the far-end ATM-access  
endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped so they can be correlated for  
OpenLane SLV reports.  
H
H
Back-to-Back Operation. Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected  
via a leased-line network or simulation so a point-to-point configuration can  
be implemented.  
Configuration Upload/Download and Software Download Capability.  
Provides quick transfer of configuration options to and from nodes and  
software downloads while the unit is running using the standard File Transfer  
Protocol (FTP). Two software images can be stored.  
H
H
Dual Flash Memory. Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and  
running. Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user’s  
discretion.  
OpenLane Service Level Management Solution. Provides an  
advanced, standards-based performance monitoring and management  
application.  
Being standards-based, the OpenLane SLM system can also be used with  
other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM’s NetView.  
OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane  
features with the OpenView Web interface.  
Being Web-based, the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data  
contained in the database to provide anytime, anywhere access to this  
information via a Web browser.  
Some of the OpenLane SLM system’s features include:  
— Real-time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement  
details (not averages, which can skew performance results) of service  
level agreement (SLA) parameters.  
— Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical  
reports so frame relay SLAs can be verified.  
— Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy-to-use tool for performing  
tests, which include end-to-end, PVC loopback, connectivity, and physical  
interface tests.  
— Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices, and set  
RMON alarms and thresholds. Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be  
assigned.  
— Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with  
their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered  
automatically, along with their PVCs.  
— A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system.  
— Firmware downloading provides an easy-to-use tool for downloading to  
an entire network or a portion of the network.  
— On-demand polling of FrameSaver devices, and SNMP polling and  
reporting are available.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About FrameSaver SLV In-Line Monitors  
H
NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probe Support. Provides complete  
LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monitoring functions for FrameSaver SLV  
devices. The following features are supported using this application:  
— Thresholds for RMON 1 (Remote Monitoring, Version 1) alarms and  
events can be configured.  
— (Models 9820 and 9820-2M.) Performance monitoring can be performed  
using collected RMON 2 (Version 2) data. NetScout Manager Plus’s  
Protocol Directory and Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver SLV  
9820 and 9820-2M units to measure up to eleven network-layer protocols  
and report the amount of traffic generated by each. Its IP Top Talkers and  
Listeners reporting identifies the devices using network bandwidth for  
traffic and protocol analysis, identifying the network’s top six users. In  
addition, it collects performance statistics from FrameSaver devices. Up  
to 900 samples can be stored in 15-minute buckets, with 96 buckets in a  
24-hour period, for up to five days worth of data.  
— Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver  
devices at sites where full 7-layer monitoring, an unlimited number of  
protocols, and advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are  
desired.  
OSI Layers Monitored  
9820  
1–3  
9820-2M  
1–3  
9820-8M  
1–2  
9820-45M  
1–2  
Using:  
FrameSaver SLV  
Netscout Probe  
3–7  
3–7  
3–7  
3–7  
H
Hardware Bypass Feature. In the event of catastrophic system failure or  
power loss, data traffic is routed through hardware directly between the  
network port and the user data port.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and  
Basic Operation  
2
This chapter tells you how to access, use, and navigate the menu-driven user  
interface. It includes the following:  
H
H
H
H
Logging On  
Main Menu  
Screen Work Areas  
Navigating the Screens  
Keyboard Keys  
Function Keys  
Selecting from a Menu  
Switching Between Screen Areas  
Selecting a Field  
Entering Information  
What appears on the screens depends on:  
H
H
Current configuration – How your network is currently configured.  
Security access level – The security level set by the system administrator  
for each user.  
H
Data selection criteria – What you entered in previous screens.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Logging On  
Start a session using one of the following methods:  
H
Telnet session via:  
— An in-band management channel through the frame relay network.  
— A local in-band management channel configured on the DTE port  
between the FrameSaver unit and the router.  
H
H
Dial-in connection using the internal modem (Model 9820-45M).  
Direct terminal connection over the COM port (Terminal port on the  
Model 9820-45M).  
When logging on, the User Interface Idle screen appears.  
H
H
If no security was set up or security was disabled, the Main Menu screen  
(see Main Menu on page 2-4) appears. You can begin your session.  
If security was set up and is enabled, you are prompted for a login. Enter  
your login ID and password.  
When the user interface has been idle, a session is automatically ended and the  
screen goes blank when the unit times out. Press Enter to reactivate the  
interface.  
" Procedure  
To log in when security is being enforced:  
1. Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter.  
2. Type your Password and press Enter.  
— Valid characters – All printable ASCII characters  
— Number of characters – Up to 10 characters can be entered in the  
Login ID and Password fields  
— Case-sensitive Yes  
An asterisk (*) appears in the password field for each character entered.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
If your login was . . .  
Then the . . .  
Valid  
Main Menu appears. Begin your session.  
Invalid  
Message, Invalid Password, appears on line 24, and  
the Login screen is redisplayed.  
After three unsuccessful attempts:  
– A Telnet session is closed.  
– The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly  
connected terminal.  
– An external modem is disconnected.  
– An SNMP trap is generated.  
Access is denied.  
See your system administrator to verify your login (Login  
ID/Password combination).  
If two sessions are already active, wait and try again.  
H
H
If attempting to access the unit through Telnet, the local Telnet client process  
returns a Connection refused:message.  
If attempting to access the unit over the COM (or Terminal) port or Modem  
port, not via Telnet, the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed.  
The type of connection (Telnet connection, direct COM (or Terminal) port  
connection, or direct Modem port connection) for each current user is  
identified, along with the user’s login ID.  
" Procedure  
To end the session:  
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the function keys area of the screen.  
2. Type e (Exit) and press Enter.  
— For a COM (Terminal) port-connected terminal, the session is ended.  
— For a modem port-connected terminal, the session is ended and the  
modem is disconnected.  
— For a Telnet connection, the session is closed and, if no other Telnet or  
FTP session is occurring over the connection, the modem is  
disconnected.  
If ending a session from the Configuration branch, see Saving Configuration  
Options in Chapter 3, Configuration Procedures.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Main Menu  
Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit’s tasks begins at the Main Menu, which has  
five menus or branches. The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears  
when security has been set up.  
main  
Access Level: 1  
MAIN MENU  
9820-45M  
05/13/2000 02:01  
Device Name: Node A  
Slot: 1 Type: T1 FR NAM  
Status  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
Easy Install (Model 9820-45M only)  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions Exit  
Select . . .  
To . . .  
Status  
View diagnostic tests, interfaces, PVC connections, and  
statistics. You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit  
identity information.  
Test  
Select and cancel test for the FrameSaver unit’s interfaces.  
Display and edit the configuration options.  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a  
selected application. You can automatically populate network  
and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric settings.  
Control  
Control the asynchronous user interface for call directories,  
device naming, login administration, and selecting software  
releases. You can also initiate a power-on reset of the  
FrameSaver unit.  
See Appendix A, Menu Hierarchy, for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy,  
which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit’s menus and screens.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Screen Work Areas  
There are two user work areas:  
H
H
Screen area – Where you input information into fields.  
Function keys area – Where you perform specific screen functions.  
Below is a sample configuration screen showing a 2 Mbps unit.  
Model Number  
Date and Time  
Menu Path  
main/config/system/slv..  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-2M  
05/13/2000 02:02  
Device  
Name  
SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS  
SLV Sample Interval (secs):  
SLV Delivery Ratio:  
60  
Disable  
DLCI Down on SLV Timeout:  
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold:  
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold: 1  
Enable  
3
Screen  
Area  
SLV Packet Size (bytes):  
SLV Synchronization Role:  
64  
Tributary  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Save  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Function  
Keys Area  
Message Area  
Screen Format  
Description  
Menu Path  
Device Name  
9820  
Menu selections made to reach the current screen.  
Customer-assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit.  
FrameSaver unit’s model number: the 128 kbps 9820,  
2 Mbps 9820-2M, 8 Mbps 9820-8M, or 45 Mbps  
9820-45M.  
Screen Area  
Selection, display, and input fields for monitoring and  
maintaining the FrameSaver unit.  
Function Keys Area  
Message Area  
Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a  
specified key, then pressing Enter.  
System-related information and valid settings for input  
fields in the lower left corner.  
System and Test Status messages in the lower right  
corner.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Navigating the Screens  
You can navigate the screens by:  
H
H
Using keyboard keys.  
Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys.  
Keyboard Keys  
Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area:  
Press . . .  
To . . .  
Ctrl-a  
Move cursor between the screen area and the  
screen function keys area.  
Esc  
Return to the previous screen.  
Right Arrow (on same screen row), or Move cursor to the next field.  
Tab (on any screen row)  
Left Arrow (on same screen row), or  
Ctrl-k  
Move cursor to the previous field.  
Backspace  
Move cursor one position to the left or to the  
last character of the previous field.  
Spacebar  
Select the next valid value for the field.  
Delete character that the cursor is on.  
Delete (Del)  
Up Arrow or Ctrl-u  
Move cursor up one field within a column on the  
same screen.  
Down Arrow or Ctrl-d  
Right Arrow or Ctrl-f  
Left Arrow or Ctrl-b  
Ctrl-l  
Move cursor down one field within a column on  
the same screen.  
Move cursor one character to the right if in edit  
mode.  
Move cursor one character to the left if in edit  
mode.  
Redraw the screen display, clearing information  
typed in but not yet entered.  
Enter (Return)  
Accept entry or, when pressed before entering  
data or after entering invalid data, display valid  
options on the last row of the screen.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Function Keys  
All function keys (located in the lower part of the screen) operate the same way  
throughout the screens. They are not case-sensitive, so upper- or lowercase  
letters can be used interchangeably.  
These keys use the following conventions:  
For the screen  
Select . . .  
M or m  
E or e  
N or n  
O or o  
L or l  
And press Enter to . . .  
Return to the Main Menu screen.  
Terminate the asynchronous terminal session.  
Enter new data.  
function . . .  
MainMenu  
Exit  
New  
Modify  
Modify existing data.  
Delete  
Save  
Delete data.  
S or s  
R or r  
Save information.  
Refresh  
ClrStats  
Update screen with current information.  
C or c  
Clear network performance statistics and refresh the  
screen.  
Variations include:  
H ClrSLV&DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI  
statistics.  
H ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics.  
Display the previous page.  
U or u  
D or d  
PgUp  
PgDn  
Display the next page.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Selecting from a Menu  
" Procedure  
To select from a menu:  
1. Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection,  
or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list.  
Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor  
from position to position.  
2. Press Enter. The selected menu or screen appears.  
" Procedure  
To return to a previous screen, press the Escape (Esc) key until you reach the  
desired screen.  
Switching Between Screen Areas  
Use Ctrl-a to switch between screen areas.  
" Procedure  
To switch to the function keys area:  
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area.  
2. Select either the function’s designated (underlined) character or  
Tab to the desired function key.  
3. Press Enter. The function is performed.  
To return to the screen area, press Ctrl-a again.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Selecting a Field  
Once you reach the desired menu or screen, select a field to view or change, or  
issue a command.  
Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another. The  
current setting or value appears to the right of the field.  
Entering Information  
You can enter information in one of three ways. Select the field, then:  
H
Manually type in (enter) the field value or command.  
Example:  
Entering bjk as a user’s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen (from the  
Control menu/branch).  
H
H
Type in (enter) the first letter(s) of a field value or command, using the unit’s  
character-matching feature.  
Example:  
When configuring a port’s physical characteristics with the Port (DTE)  
Initiated Loopbacks configuration option/field selected (possible settings  
include Disable, Local, DTPLB, DCLB, and Both), entering d or D displays  
the first value starting with d – Disable. In this example, entering dt or DT  
would display DTPLB as the selection.  
Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated  
function key.  
Example:  
To save a configuration option change, select Save. S or s is the designated  
function key.  
If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections, press the  
spacebar; the first valid setting for the field appears. Continue pressing the  
spacebar to scroll through other possible settings.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
This page intentionally left blank.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Procedures  
3
This chapter includes the following:  
H
Basic Configuration  
Configuration Option Areas  
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options  
Changing Configuration Options  
Saving Configuration Options  
Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Procedures  
Basic Configuration  
Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates. Use  
the FrameSaver unit’s Configuration Edit/Display menu to display or change  
configuration option settings.  
The Configuration Edit/Display menu of a FrameSaver SLV 9820-2M is shown  
below.  
Configuration Menu  
main/config  
9820-2M  
Device Name: Node A  
5/13/2000 23:32  
CONFIGURATION EDIT/DISPLAY  
System  
Network  
Data Ports  
PVC Connections  
Management and Communication  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Save  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Changing an Auto-Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit’s  
configuration. See Setting Up Auto-Configuration for additional information.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Procedures  
Configuration Option Areas  
The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings, which are  
located in the Factory Default Configuration option area. You can find the default  
settings for configuration options in the:  
H
H
FrameSaver SLV, Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M, and 9820-45M, Quick  
Reference  
Configuration Option Tables  
If the factory default settings do not support your network’s configuration, you can  
customize the configuration options to better suit your application.  
Four configuration option storage areas are available.  
Configuration Option Area Description  
Current Configuration  
The currently active set of configuration options.  
Customer Configuration 1  
An alternate set of configuration options that the  
customer can set up and store for future use.  
Customer Configuration 2  
Another alternate set of configuration options that the  
customer can set up and store for future use.  
Default Factory Configuration A read-only configuration area containing the factory  
default set of configuration options.  
You can load and edit default factory configuration  
settings, but you can only save those changes to the  
Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2 configuration  
option areas.  
The Current, Customer 1, and Customer 2 configuration  
option areas are identical to the Default Factory  
Configuration until modified by the customer.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Procedures  
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options  
To access and display configuration options, load (copy) the applicable  
configuration option set into the edit area.  
" Procedure  
To load a set of configuration options for editing:  
1. From the Main Menu, press the down arrow key so the cursor is on  
Configuration.  
2. Press Enter to display the Configuration menu. The Load Configuration  
From: menu appears.  
NOTE:  
Loading a configuration with many DLCIs from a unit’s Customer  
Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time. Allow a minute or more  
for the file to be loaded.  
3. Select the configuration option area from which you want to load  
configuration options and press Enter (Current Configuration, Customer  
Configuration 1, Customer Configuration 2, or Default Factory Configuration).  
The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit  
area and the Configuration Edit/Display menu appears.  
This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu Configuration  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Procedures  
Changing Configuration Options  
" Procedure  
To change configuration option settings:  
1. From the Configuration Edit/Display menu, select a set of configuration  
options and press Enter.  
For example:  
Configuration PVC Connections  
2. Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network, and  
make appropriate changes to the setting(s). See Chapter 2, User Interface  
and Basic Operation, for additional information.  
When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs, some  
configuration options will be blank. For a valid setting to appear, Tab to the  
configuration option and press the spacebar.  
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete.  
NOTE:  
— Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options.  
— Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and  
run tests.  
— Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options; they  
cannot change configuration options or run tests.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Procedures  
Saving Configuration Options  
When changes to the configuration options are complete, use the Save function  
key to save your changes to either the Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2  
configuration areas.  
NOTE:  
When changing settings, you must Save for changes to take effect.  
" Procedure  
To save the configuration option changes:  
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Type s or S to select the Save function and press Enter.  
The Save Configuration To: screen appears.  
NOTE:  
If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes, a Save  
Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response.  
— If you select No, the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes  
are not saved.  
— If you select Yes, the Save Configuration To: screen appears.  
3. Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes  
(usually the Current Configuration) and press Enter.  
When Save is complete, Command Completeappears in the message area  
at the bottom of the screen.  
NOTE:  
There are other methods of changing configurations, like SNMP and  
Auto-Configuration. Since multiple sessions can be active at the same  
time, the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes  
being made. For instance:  
— Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration  
changes made via another method to be lost.  
— If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and  
saves them, your changes would be lost.  
Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units  
At a minimum, the following configuration options must be set before deploying a  
a FrameSaver unit to a remote site:  
H
H
Node IP Address  
Node Subnet Mask  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
4
This chapter includes the following:  
H
H
H
Configuring Using the Easy Install Screen (Model 9820-45M)  
Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock  
Setting Up for Trap Dial-Out (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial-Out  
Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out  
Setting Up Auto-Configuration  
H
H
Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode  
Automatically Removing a Circuit  
Setting Up Management  
Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site  
Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP  
Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site  
Setting Up Back-to-Back Operation  
H
Changing Operating Mode  
H
H
Configuration Option Tables  
Configuring the Overall System  
Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System  
Configuring Service Level Verification Options  
Configuring General System Options  
Configuring the Physical Interfaces  
H
Configuring the Network Data Port  
Configuring the User Data Port  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Options  
H
H
H
H
Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface  
Manually Configuring DLCI Records  
Configuring PVC Connections  
Setting Up Management and Communication Options  
Configuring Node IP Information  
Configuring Management PVCs  
Configuring General SNMP Management  
Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support  
Configuring SNMP NMS Security  
Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out  
Configuring the Ethernet Port (Model 9820-45M)  
Configuring the Communication Port  
Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
Configuring the Modem Port (Model 9820-45M)  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Options  
Configuring Using the Easy Install Screen  
(Model 9820-45M)  
The Easy Install screen provides direct access to the configuration options  
required to establish communication and prepare for Auto-Configuration.  
Main Menu Easy Install  
Table 4-1. Easy Install Configuration Options (1 of 2)  
Node IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies the IP address needed to access the node. Since an IP address is not bound  
to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.  
This address may be shared only among management PVCs.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the node, which can be  
viewed or edited.  
Clear – Fills the node IP address with zeros.  
Node Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node. Since the subnet mask is not  
bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the node, which can  
be viewed or edited.  
Clear – Fills the node subnet mask with zeros. When the node’s subnet mask is  
all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the  
IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C:  
255.255.255.000.  
TS Access (Type)  
Possible Settings: None, DLCI  
Default Setting: None  
Specifies whether a DLCI is defined for troubleshooting by the service provider.  
None – A troubleshooting DLCI is not defined.  
DLCI – A troubleshooting DLCI is defined. Its value must be entered in the next field.  
TS Access (DLCI)  
Possible Settings: 16–1007  
Default Setting: blank  
Specifies the DLCI on the network interface to be used for troubleshooting by the  
service provider.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI.  
Create a Dedicated Network Management Link  
With the cursor on the Create a Dedicated Network Management Link field, press Enter.  
When prompted, enter a DLCI for the link from 16 to 1007. The management link DLCI  
is added or modified.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-1. Easy Install Configuration Options (2 of 2)  
Ethernet Port Options Screen  
With the cursor on the Ethernet Port Options Screen field, press Enter. The Ethernet  
Port Options screen appears. See Configuring the Ethernet Port on page 4-50.  
After configuring the Ethernet port configuration options, save your changes. Then  
press ESC to return to the Easy Install screen.  
Entering System Information and  
Setting the System Clock  
Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the  
unit, its location, and a contact for the unit, as well as to set the system clock.  
Main Menu Control System Information  
The following information is available for viewing. Save any entries or changes.  
If the selection is . . . Enter the . . .  
Device Name  
Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters.  
SNMP system name; can be up to 255 characters.  
System Name  
System Location  
System Contact  
System’s physical location; can be up to 255 characters.  
Name and how to contact the system person; can be up to  
255 characters.  
Date  
Time  
Current date in the month/day/year format (mm/dd/yyyy).  
Current time in the hours:minutes format (hh:mm:ss).  
NOTE:  
To clear existing information, place the cursor in the Clear field (Tab to the  
Clear field) and press Enter.  
See Chapter 5, Security and Logins, to set up and administer logins.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Setting Up for Trap Dial-Out  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
An external modem can be attached to the COM port for dialing out when an  
SNMP trap is generated.  
To set up an external modem, you need to:  
1. Set up SNMP trap managers.  
2. Set up an external modem.  
3. Set up Modem Directory phone numbers.  
4. Configure trap dial-out.  
See Configuring SNMP NMS Security to set up SNMP trap managers.  
See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out when trap dial-out is desired.  
See Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out for trap and alarm information.  
Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial-Out  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M.) When trap dial-out is desired, the PC or  
asynchronous terminal must be disconnected from the unit’s COM port when  
setup is complete, and an external modem connected instead. See Configuring  
the COM Port to Support an External Modem for additional information.  
Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M.) To set up call directories:  
" Procedure  
1. Set up directory phone numbers.  
Main Menu Control Modem Call Directories  
2. Select Directory Number A (for Alarm).  
3. Enter the phone number(s).  
Valid characters include . . . For . . .  
ASCII text  
Entering the phone number.  
Readability characters.  
Space,  
underscore ( _ ), and  
dash (–)  
Comma (,)  
Readability character for a 2-second pause.  
Blind dialing.  
B
P
T
Pulse dialing, unless B is specified.  
Tone dialing, unless B is specified.  
Wait for dial tone.  
W
4. Save the phone number(s).  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Setting Up Auto-Configuration  
The auto-configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic  
configuration and connection of DLCIs within the FrameSaver unit, as well as to  
automatically remove DLCIs and connections that are no longer supported by the  
network service provider. Auto-configuration also maintains associated DLCI  
option settings when Standard LMI is used on the network data port.  
Main Menu Auto-Configuration  
Auto-Configuration Screen Example  
main/auto-configuration  
Device Name: Node A  
9820–2M  
5/13/2000 23:32  
AUTO-CONFIGURATION  
Frame Relay Discovery Mode:  
Automatic Circuit Removal:  
1MPort  
Enable  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Save  
MainMenu  
Exit  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode  
When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active, the FrameSaver unit “discovers”  
network DLCIs from the network LMI status response message. It configures a  
network DLCI, a user data port DLCI, and automatically connects them to create  
a PVC.  
Main Menu Auto-Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode  
Automatically configured network DLCIs are multiplexed, and each automatically  
configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding  
network DLCI. These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been  
available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link, between your  
equipment and the network.  
NOTE:  
A local Management PVC (e.g., the PVC between the router and the  
FrameSaver unit’s user data port) must be configured manually; it cannot  
be configured automatically (see Setting Up Local Management at the  
Central Site).  
The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected:  
Discovery Mode  
Configuration Description  
1MPort  
H Auto-configuration is enabled on Port-1.  
(default)  
H A management DLCI is configured.  
H A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded  
DLCIs (EDLCIs) is configured for Port-1 user data and  
management data.  
H A PVC connection is configured between the network  
and port DLCIs.  
1Port  
H Auto-configuration is enabled on Port-1.  
H No management DLCI is configured.  
H A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port-1  
user data.  
H A PVC connection is configured between the network  
and port DLCIs.  
NetOnly  
Disable  
H Auto-configuration of a network DLCI only; no Port-1 or  
PVC connections are configured.  
H No Port-1, PVC connection, or management DLCI is  
configured.  
H No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration  
takes place.  
The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
NOTE:  
If 1MPort (the default) is not the setting required for your application, change  
the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecting the network cable or  
editing discovered option settings. Otherwise, the FrameSaver unit will start  
“discovering” DLCIs as soon as it powers up.  
To recover from this problem, edit a selected “discovered” DLCI or PVC  
connection manually if any DLCIs or PVC Connections have been configured  
manually. If only a local management PVC between the router and the  
FrameSaver unit has been configured, select the desired Frame Relay  
Discovery Mode and Save the change.  
The default discovery mode is 1MPort (management DLCIs multiplexed with data  
DLCIs on Port-1, which creates two embedded DLCIs [EDLCIs] – one EDLCI for  
Port-1 user data, and another EDLCI for management data); that is, for each  
DLCI discovered on the network, a multiplexed network DLCI and a standard  
data port DLCI will be configured and connected, and a Management PVC will be  
embedded in the network DLCI. When LMI is active on the network interface and  
PVC status information (with provisioned DLCI numbers) is next received from  
the network, the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration  
area.  
Configuration options set by the selected discovery mode can be manually  
modified, refined, or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus.  
No previously discovered and configured DLCIs or cross-connections will be  
removed unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled (see  
Automatically Removing a Circuit). Additional discovered DLCIs will be configured  
according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting. Selecting or  
changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks.  
NOTE:  
When auto-configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI, but a standard DLCI is  
needed, change the DLCI to standard from the network DLCI Records  
screen: Configuration Network DLCI Records  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration Options  
When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and saved, the Saving will  
cause Auto-Configuration to update and Restart. Are you  
sure?prompt appears. No is the default for this prompt.  
H
If Yes (y) is entered, the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections?  
prompt appears. No is the default for this prompt.  
— If Yes is entered, all multiplexed DLCIs and PVC Connections are  
deleted, except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the  
primary destination and the Management PVC that is designated as  
TS Management Link.  
— If No is entered, previously discovered and auto-configured option  
settings will not be removed, but configuration updates due to LMI  
response messages are performed according to the just saved mode  
setting.  
H
If No (n) is entered, or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt,  
no Auto-Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI  
response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting.  
Automatically Removing a Circuit  
Using the automatic circuit removal feature, which comes enabled, network  
DLCIs and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit’s configuration  
when the the network service provider no longer supports them. Automatic  
deletion is based upon information from a LMI full status response on an active  
frame relay link.  
When this feature is set to:  
H
Enable – The following will be automatically removed from the unit’s  
configuration:  
— Unsupported network DLCIs and PVC connections that include  
multiplexed network DLCIs.  
— Unsupported standard network DLCIs that are not configured as the  
primary destination in a management PVC.  
— Non-management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLCIs  
are included.  
— DLCIs not included in three consecutive LMI full status response  
messages.  
— LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI.  
All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and  
they revert to their default settings.  
A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is down,  
or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link.  
H
Disable – Unused network DLCIs, PVC connections, and management PVCs  
must be manually removed.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Setting Up Management  
FrameSaver units are already set up for SNMP management, with Community  
Name 1 set to Public and Name 1 Access set to Read/Write. For remote sites,  
other than the IP Address, this is all that is required.  
Configuration Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management  
See Table 4-12, General SNMP Management Options, for configuration  
information. For the central site, local management between the unit and the  
router must be set up, as well (see Setting Up Local Management at the Central  
Site).  
Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site  
Set up a local management PVC between the central site unit and its router for  
local management control by the end-user customer.  
" Procedure  
To set up management through the router:  
1. Create a DLCI that will be used for management on the user data port.  
Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records  
2. Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just created.  
Configuration Management and Communication Management PVC  
Minimally, enter the following options:  
— Name for the management PVC  
— Interface IP Address and Subnet Mask, if different from the Node’s  
— Primary Link for this Management PVC (the user data port)  
— Primary DLCI (i.e., the data port DLCI)  
3. Save the configuration.  
See Table 4-8, DLCI Record Options, and Table 4-11, Management PVC Options,  
for configuration information.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP  
Using the system’s standard Routing Information Protocol (RIP) feature, routing  
information is passed to the router over the management PVC, so the router can  
learn routes to FrameSaver SLV devices. Node IP information should be set up  
(see Configuring Node IP Information).  
" Procedure  
1. Configure the router to receive RIP.  
For example, if using a Cisco router, configure config-t, router RIP,  
int serialx, IP RIP Receive version 1, then ctl-z WR.  
2. Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port.  
Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records  
3. Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured.  
Configuration Management and Communication Management PVCs  
4. Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out, and Save the configuration.  
Refer to Table 4-8, DLCI Record Options, and Table 4-11. Management PVC  
Options for configuration information.  
Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site  
When management needs to be set up between a service provider’s customer  
and its network operations center (NOC), a non-multiplexed DLCI must be  
configured to carry management data between the customer’s central site and  
the NOC console. This requires that a frame relay discovered DLCI needs to be  
modified. This is because all auto-configured network DLCIs are configured as  
multiplexed DLCIs.  
" Procedure  
To set up NOC management:  
1. Select DLCI Records on the network interface.  
Configuration Network DLCI Records  
2. Select Modify. The Modify DLCI Record for DLCI Numberprompt  
appears.  
3. Select the DLCI that will be used by pressing the spacebar until the correct  
DLCI number appears, then select it.  
4. Change the DLCI Type from Multiplexed to Standard.  
The DLCI in connections. Update DLCI usage as follows:  
prompt appears.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
5. Select the Delete EDLCI Connections and Make a Mgmt Only  
PVCoption.  
PVC connections for the selected DLCI are broken, the Port-1 DLCI mapped  
to this network DLCI and the embedded management DLCI (EDLCI) are  
deleted, and the selected DLCI will be reconfigured as a management PVC  
using the Node IP Address.  
See Table 4-8, DLCI Record Options, for configuration information.  
Setting Up Back-to-Back Operation  
Using this special feature, you can set up two FrameSaver units that are  
connected back-to-back without frame relay switches between them, as in a  
test bench setup.  
Changing Operating Mode  
When setting up back-to-back operation:  
H
H
One unit must be configured for Standard operation, which is the setting for  
normal operation.  
The other unit must be configured for Back-to-Back operation so it presents  
the network side of the UNI (user-network interface).  
Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed.  
" Procedure  
To set up back-to-back operation:  
1. On the unit to be configured for Back-to-Back operation, manually configure  
DLCIs; DLCIs should be configured before connecting the two units.  
2. Access the Change Operating Mode screen.  
Main Menu Control Change Operating Mode  
3. Select Back-to-Back Operation, and respond Yes to the Are you sure?  
prompt.  
4. Save the change.  
" Procedure  
To return the unit to normal operation:  
1. Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard  
Operation.  
2. Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change. The units can be  
reconnected to a standard frame relay network.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuration Option Tables  
Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order,  
even though this may not be the order in which you access them when  
configuring the unit.  
The following configuration option tables are included:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Table 4-2. System Frame Relay and LMI Options  
Table 4-3. Service Level Verification Options  
Table 4-4. General System Options  
Table 4-5. Network Data Port Physical Interface Options  
Table 4-6. User Data Port Physical Interface Options  
Table 4-7. Interface Frame Relay Options  
Table 4-8. DLCI Record Options  
Table 4-9. PVC Connection Options  
Table 4-10. Node IP Options  
Table 4-11. Management PVC Options  
Table 4-12. General SNMP Management Options  
Table 4-13. Telnet and FTP Session Options  
Table 4-14. SNMP NMS Security Options  
Table 4-15. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options  
Table 4-16. Ethernet Port Options (Model 9820-45M)  
Table 4-17. Communication Port Options  
Table 4-18. External Modem (COM Port) Options (Models 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M)  
H
Table 4-19. Modem Port Options (Model 9820-45M)  
Configuring the Overall System  
The System menu includes the following:  
H
H
H
Frame Relay and LMI  
Service Level Verification  
General  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System  
Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the  
Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system (see Table 4-2).  
Main Menu Configuration System Frame Relay and LMI  
See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface to set an interface’s frame relay  
options.  
Table 4-2. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (1 of 2)  
LMI Behavior  
Possible Settings: Independent,  
Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1,  
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1,  
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1  
Default Setting: Independent  
Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to  
another, determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state. Sometimes  
referred to as LMI pass-through.  
Independent – Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state  
of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface. Provides LMI  
Spoofing. This is the recommended setting when backup is configured, and for Network  
Service Providers (NSPs).  
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1 – Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on  
Port-1 goes down, disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads.  
When LMI on Port-1 comes back up, the network interface is reenabled. The LMI state  
on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port-1. That is, the network  
interface’s LMI follows Port-1’s LMI. Used at central sites, this setting is useful when the  
remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a  
redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure. Not  
recommended for NSPs.  
Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on Port-1 when LMI on the network  
interface goes down, disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads. When LMI on the  
network interface comes back up, Port-1 is reenabled and its control leads are  
reasserted. The LMI state on Port-1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network  
interface. That is, Port-1’s LMI follows the network interface’s LMI. This setting is useful  
if the router connected to Port-1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are  
detected.  
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on the network interface  
when LMI on Port-1 goes down (or LMI down on Port-1 when LMI on the network  
interface goes down), and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the  
other interface. That is, the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other. Use  
this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit. It is not recommended  
since it makes fault isolation more difficult.  
Traffic Policing  
Possible Settings: Disable, Enable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and Excess Information Rate  
(EIR) are enforced for frames sent to the network frame relay link.  
Display Conditions – This option appears only for Model 9820-45M.  
Disable – CIR and EIR are not enforced.  
Enable – CIR and EIR are enforced.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-2. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (2 of 2)  
LMI Error Event (N2)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10  
Default Setting: 3  
Configures the LMI-defined N2 parameter, which sets the number of errors that can  
occur on the LMI link before an error is reported. Applies to both the user and network  
sides of a UNI.  
1 – 10 – Specifies the maximum number of errors.  
LMI Clearing Event (N3)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10  
Default Setting: 1  
Configures the LMI-defined N3 parameter, which sets the number of error-free  
messages that must be received before clearing an error event. Applies to both the user  
and network sides of a UNI.  
1 – 10 – Specifies how many error-free messages it will take to clear the error event.  
LMI Status Enquiry (N1)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . 255  
Default Setting: 6  
Configures the LMI-defined N1 parameter, which sets the number of status enquiry  
polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is  
initiated. Applies to the user side of a UNI only.  
1 – 255 – Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated  
before a full status enquiry is initiated.  
LMI Heartbeat (T1)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 10  
Configures the LMI-defined T1 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between  
the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI. Applies to the user  
side of a UNI only.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry  
messages in increments of 5.  
LMI Inbound Heartbeat (T2)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 15  
Configures the LMI-defined T2 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between  
the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI. Applies to the  
network side of a UNI only.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry  
messages in increments of 5.  
LMI N4 Measurement Period (T3)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 20  
Configures the LMI-defined T3 parameter, which is the time interval (in seconds) that the  
network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry  
messages that have been received (N4) from the user side.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring Service Level Verification Options  
SLV options are selected from the System menu (see Table 4-3).  
Main Menu Configuration System Service Level Verification  
Table 4-3. Service Level Verification Options (1 of 2)  
SLV Sample Interval (secs)  
Possible Settings: 10 – 3600  
Default Setting: 60  
Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV devices. Inband  
communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency, as well as transmission  
success and other SLV information.  
10 – 3600 – Sets the SLV Sample Interval (secs) in seconds.  
SLV Delivery Ratio  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios (FDR/DDR)  
between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled. To use this capability, both ends of all  
PVCs must be FrameSaver SLV devices. If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or  
9624s, they must be running software version 1.2 or higher.  
Enable – An extra byte for FDR/DDR statistics collection is included with each frame,  
which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the  
network.  
Disable – Extra byte is not included.  
DLCI Down on SLV Timeout  
Available Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether a DLCI is declared Inactive after the configured threshold for SLV  
Timeout has been exceeded.  
NOTE: This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCIs connected to a far-end unit  
with hardware bypass capability.  
Enable – After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded,  
the DLCI’s status is changed to Inactive.  
Disable – An SLV Timeout Error Event does not affect DLCI status.  
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold  
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20  
Default Setting: 3  
Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be  
detected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared.  
120 – Sets the limit for these error events.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-3. Service Level Verification Options (2 of 2)  
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold  
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20  
Default Setting: 1  
Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the  
DLCI Inactive status is cleared.  
1 – 20 – Sets the limit for the clearing event.  
SLV Packet Size (bytes)  
Available Settings: 64 – 2048  
Default Setting: 64  
Sets the size of packets, in bytes, that will be used for SLV communications. SLV  
packets are used to track latency and other SLV-related variables.  
When the packet size is changed, a new round trip and average latency calculation  
must be performed, so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance  
Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred.  
64 – 2048 – Sets the packet size for SLV communications.  
SLV Synchronization Role  
Available Settings: Tributary, Controller, None  
Default Setting: Tributary  
Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data  
collection and storage between SLV devices.  
Tributary – Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and  
provides network-based synchronization information to other devices in the network.  
Controller – Uses its own internal time-of-day clock and provides synchronization  
information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock.  
NOTE: Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV  
synchronization controller.  
None – Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out.  
This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable, or  
when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring General System Options  
Select General from the System menu to configure the general system  
configuration options (see Table 4-4).  
Main Menu Configuration System General  
Table 4-4. General System Options  
Test Timeout  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they  
are terminated automatically.  
Enable – All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout. This setting is recommended  
when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in-band data stream. If the  
FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface  
providing the management access, control can be regained after the timeout expires,  
terminating the test.  
Disable – Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated.  
Test Duration (min)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 120  
Default Setting: 10  
Specifies the maximum duration of the tests.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable.  
1 – 120 – Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes (inclusive).  
Power Up Selftest  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether a self-test runs when the unit is powered on. Disabling the self-test  
reduces the time it takes for the unit to become operational.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears for Model 9820-45M.  
Enable – The power-on self-test runs.  
Disable – The power-on self-test does not run.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring the Physical Interfaces  
Characteristics for the following physical interfaces can be configured:  
H
H
Network Data Port Physical Interface Options  
User Data Port Physical Interface Options  
Configuring the Network Data Port  
Select Physical to display or change the physical configuration options for the  
port being used as the network interface (see Table 4-5).  
Main Menu Configuration Network Physical  
The network data port physical interface acts as a DTE. The network interface  
automatically detects the rate offered by the external NTU, CSU/DSU, or inverse  
multiplexer.  
Table 4-5. Network Data Port Physical Interface Options (1 of 2)  
Port Type  
Possible Settings: E530, V.35, X.21  
Default Setting: V.35  
Selects the type of port to be used for the network data port.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M, for which the  
port type is HSSI.  
E530 – The port is configured as an EIA-530-A-compatible DTE. An EIA-530 compatible  
DCE can be directly connected to the DB25 connector for this port on the rear of the  
FrameSaver unit.  
V.35 – The port is configured as a V.35-compatible DTE. A V.35-compatible DCE can be  
connected to the DB25 connector for this port using an adapter cable on the rear of the  
FrameSaver unit.  
X.21 – The port is configured as a V.11/X.21-compatible DTE. A V.11/X.21-compatible  
DCE can be connected to the DB25 connector for this port using an adapter cable on  
the rear of the FrameSaver unit.  
Invert Internal Clock  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether the internal clock (used for timing data transmitted to the DCE) will be  
phase-inverted with respect to the clock received at the interface. This option is useful  
when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver device and the DCE are causing  
errors.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M.  
Enable – The internal clock used to transmit data to the DCE is phase inverted with  
respect to the clock supplied by the DCE to this port.  
Disable – The internal clock is not inverted (normal).  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-5. Network Data Port Physical Interface Options (2 of 2)  
Monitor DSR  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the state of the DCE Ready (DSR) circuit on the network data port  
will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the unit.  
When this condition is detected, an alarm is generated, LMI is declared down, and no  
further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when when Port Type is set to  
X.21. The signal is assumed to be asserted.  
Enable – Interchange circuit CC (ITU/CCITT 107) – DSR is monitored to determine  
when valid data is being sent from the DCE.  
Disable – DSR is not monitored. DSR is assumed to be asserted and data is  
transmitted, regardless of the actual state of the lead.  
Monitor CTS  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the state of the Clear to Send (CTS) circuit on the network data port  
will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the unit.  
When this condition is detected, an alarm is generated, LMI is declared down, and no  
further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M, or when Port  
Type is set to X.21. The signal is assumed to be asserted.  
Enable – Interchange circuit CB (ITU/CCITT 106) – CTS is monitored to determine  
whether data should be transmitted to the DCE.  
Disable – CTS is not monitored. CTS is assumed to be asserted and data is  
transmitted, regardless of the actual state of the lead.  
Monitor RLSD  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the state of the Received Line Signal Detector (RLSD) circuit on  
the network data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is  
possible with the unit. When this condition is detected, an alarm is generated, LMI is  
declared down, and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M. If Port Type is  
set to X.21, the Indication interchange circuit is monitored instead of RLSD.  
Enable – Interchange circuit CF (ITU/CCITT 109) – RLSD is monitored to determine  
when valid data communication is possible with the DCE.  
Disable – RLSD is not monitored. RLSD is assumed to be asserted and data is  
transmitted, regardless of the actual state of the lead.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring the User Data Port  
Select Physical to display or change the physical characteristics of the user data  
port connected to the DTE (see Table 4-6).  
Main Menu Configuration Data Ports Physical  
The data rate of the user data port is automatically set to the rate of the network  
interface.  
Table 4-6. User Data Port Physical Interface Options (1 of 2)  
Port Type  
Possible Settings: E530, V.35, X.21  
Default Setting: V.35  
Selects the type of port to be used for the user data port.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M, for which the  
port type is HSSI.  
E530 – The port is an EIA-530-A-compatible DCE. An EIA-530-A-compatible DTE can  
be directly connected to the DB25 connector.  
V.35 – The port is a V.35-compatible DCE. A V.35-compatible DTE can be connected to  
the DB25 connector by using an adapter cable.  
X.21 – The port is a V.11/X.21-compatible DCE. A V.11/X.21-compatible DTE can be  
connected to the DB25 connector by using an adapter cable.  
Transmit Clock Source  
Possible Settings: Internal, External  
Default Setting: Internal  
Determines whether the DTE’s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by  
its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE.  
NOTE: Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit  
to abort any physical port tests, including any DTE-initiated loopback tests.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M, or when Port  
Type is set to X.21.  
Internal – The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB (ITU 114) – Transmit  
Signal Element Timing (TXC) (DCE source) for timing the incoming data.  
External – The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data, and the FrameSaver  
unit uses the interchange circuit DA (ITU 113) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (XTXC)  
(DTE source) for timing the incoming data.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-6. User Data Port Physical Interface Options (2 of 2)  
Invert Transmit Clock  
Possible Settings: Auto, Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Auto  
Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit  
DB (ITU 114) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (DCE Source) TXC is phase inverted  
with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data (TD).  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M.  
Auto – The port checks the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC. If necessary, the port  
automatically phase inverts the clock with respect to the transmitted data.  
Enable – Phase inverts the TXC clock. Use this setting when long cable lengths  
between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors.  
Disable – Does not phase invert the TXC clock.  
Monitor DTR  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready (DTR) circuit on the user data port will be  
used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE. When the  
DTR off condition is detected, an alarm is generated, LMI is declared down, and no  
further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Port Type is set to X.21 (the  
signal is assumed to be asserted).  
Enable – Interchange circuit CD (ITU 108/1/2) – DTR is monitored to determine when  
valid data is sent from the DTE.  
Disable – DTR is not monitored. DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being  
transmitted, regardless of the state of the lead.  
Monitor RTS (Control)  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send (RTS) circuits on the user data port  
will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE.  
When the RTS off condition is detected, CTS is deasserted, LMI is declared down, and  
no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M.  
Enable – Interchange circuit CA (ITU 105) – RTS is monitored to determine when valid  
data communication is possible with the DTE.  
Disable – RTS is not monitored. RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being  
transmitted, regardless of the state of the lead.  
Port (DTE) Initiated Loopbacks  
Possible Settings: Local, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the port’s attached  
data terminal equipment using the port’s interchange lead LL (ITU 141) for Models  
9802, 9820-2M, and 9820-8M, or LA (ITU 143) for Model 9820-45M.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Port Type is set to X.21.  
Local – The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback.  
Disable – The DTE cannot control the local external DTE Loopback.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface  
Select Frame Relay from the interface’s menu to display or change the Frame  
Relay options for an individual interface (see Table 4-7).  
Main Menu Configuration [Network/Data Ports] Frame Relay  
See Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System for additional information.  
Table 4-7. Interface Frame Relay Options (1 of 3)  
LMI Protocol  
Possible Settings: Initialize_From_Net1FR1, Initialize_From_Interface,  
Auto_On_LMI_Fail, Standard, Annex-A, Annex-D  
Default Setting:  
For user data port links: Initialize_From_Interface  
For network data port links: Auto_On_LMI_Fail  
Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery  
source for the LMI protocol.  
Initialize_From_Net1FR1 – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be  
configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame  
relay link (Net1FR1). LMI Protocol is set to None internally, but once a protocol has  
become active or is set on the primary Network link, the protocol will be set to the same  
value on this link (Standard, Annex-A or Annex-D). The protocol will not be updated  
based on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially.  
Display Conditions – This option value only appears for a user data port.  
Initialize_From_Interface – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be  
configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE  
device. Once a protocol has become active, the protocol will be set to the protocol  
discovered (Standard, Annex-A or Annex-D) on the frame relay link. The protocol will not  
be updated after being initially discovered. Frame relay links on the user data port  
discover the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls.  
Auto_On_LMI_Fail – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured  
to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device  
whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs. This option is available for frame relay links  
on the user data port and network data ports. Frame relay links on the user data port  
discover the LMI protocol from LMI status polls on attached DTE devices. Frame relay  
links on the network data port discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached  
Network line and “listening” for correct poll response messages.  
Standard – Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the  
Standard LMI.  
Annex-A – Supports LMI as specified by Q.933, Annex A.  
Annex-D – Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1.617, Annex D.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-7. Interface Frame Relay Options (2 of 3)  
LMI Parameters  
Possible Settings: System, Custom  
Default Setting: System  
Allows you to use the system LMI options, or to set specific LMI options for this  
interface.  
System – Use system LMI options (see Table 4-2, System Frame Relay and LMI  
Options).  
Custom – Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters.  
LMI Error Event (N2)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10  
Default Setting: 3  
Configures the LMI-defined N2 parameter, which sets the number of errors that can  
occur on the LMI link before an error is reported. Applies to both the user and network  
sides of a UNI.  
1 – 10 – Specifies the maximum number of errors.  
LMI Clearing Event (N3)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10  
Default Setting: 1  
Configures the LMI-defined N3 parameter, which sets the number of error-free  
messages that must be received before clearing an error event. Applies to both the user  
and network sides of a UNI.  
1 – 10 – Specifies how many error-free messages it will take to clear the error event.  
LMI Status Enquiry (N1)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . 255  
Default Setting: 6  
Configures the LMI-defined N1 parameter, which sets the number of status enquiry  
polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is  
initiated. Applies to the user side of a UNI only.  
1 – 255 – Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated  
before a full status enquiry is initiated.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-7. Interface Frame Relay Options (3 of 3)  
LMI Heartbeat (T1)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 10  
Configures the LMI-defined T1 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between  
the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI. Applies to the user  
side of a UNI only.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry  
messages in increments of 5.  
LMI Inbound Heartbeat (T2)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 15  
Configures the LMI-defined T2 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between  
the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI. Applies to the  
network side of a UNI only.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry  
messages in increments of 5.  
LMI N4 Measurement Period (T3)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 20  
Configures the LMI-defined T3 parameter, which is the time interval (in seconds) that the  
network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry  
messages that have been received (N4) from the user side.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Manually Configuring DLCI Records  
The Auto-Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their  
PVC Connections. DLCI Records can also be created manually (see Table 4-8).  
Main MenuConfiguration[Network/Data Ports]DLCI Records  
Typically, DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management  
PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit; the unit automatically  
configures non-management DLCI Records and PVC Connections.  
Table 4-8. DLCI Record Options (1 of 3)  
DLCI Number  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record. The parameter determines which  
DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface. DLCI  
numbers range from 0 to 1023. However, the numbers 0 – 15 and 1008 – 1023 are  
reserved. Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of  
Range (16 – 1007). If the DLCI number is part of a connection, this field is read-only.  
NOTES: – If a DLCI number is not entered, the DLCI record is not created.  
– The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface.  
– Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver  
unit to abort any active frame relay tests.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.  
DLCI Type  
Possible Settings: Standard, Multiplexed  
Default Setting: Multiplexed  
Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed. This field is read-only when the  
selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is  
Standard.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for the user data port, and it cannot  
be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Management Link.  
Standard – Supports standard DLCIs as specified by the Frame Relay Standards. Use  
this setting when a non-FrameSaver unit is at the other end. For user data port DLCIs,  
this is the only selection available.  
Multiplexed – Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI. Allows a  
single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCIs as long as these  
connections are between the same two endpoints (proprietary). Do not select  
Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-8. DLCI Record Options (2 of 3)  
CIR (bps)  
Possible Settings:  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820: 0 – 128000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-2M: 0 – 2048000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-8M: 0 – 8128000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-45M: 0 – 44210000  
Default Setting: 64000  
Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry  
without discarding frames; the CIR in bits per second. Entry of an invalid rate causes the  
error message Value Out of Range (0 x), where x = the maximum line rate  
available on the port.  
0 – maximum CIR rate – Specifies the DLCI’s committed data rate.  
Tc  
Possible Settings: 1 – 65535  
Default Setting: Read Only  
Displays the DLCI’s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval (Tc) in  
milliseconds. This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst  
Size Bc (Bits) and CIR (bps) options.  
Committed Burst Size Bc (Bits)  
Possible Settings: CIR, Other  
Default Setting: CIR  
Specifies whether the DLCI’s committed burst size will follow the CIR, or whether it will  
be entered independently. This value is the maximum amount of data that the service  
provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval (Tc).  
CIR – Uses the value in the CIR (bps) option as the committed burst size (Bc). The Bc  
and excess burst size (Be) options are updated when a CIR update is received from the  
network switch.  
Other – Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLCI. When Other is  
selected, the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained, as well.  
Bc  
Possible Settings:  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820: 0 – 128000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-2M: 0 – 2048000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-8M: 0 – 8192000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-45M: 0 – 44210000  
Default Setting: 64000  
Allows you to display or change the DLCI’s committed burst size, in bits.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set  
to Other.  
0 – maximum burst size – Specifies the maximum amount of data that the network has  
agreed to deliver within the committed rate measurement interval (Tc).  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-8. DLCI Record Options (3 of 3)  
Excess Burst Size (Bits)  
Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the  
CIR without discarding frames.  
Be  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820:  
Possible Settings: 0 – 128000  
Default Setting: 64000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-2M:  
Possible Settings: 0 – 2048000  
Default Setting: 1984000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-8M:  
Possible Settings: 0 – 8192000  
Default Setting: 8128000  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-45M:  
Possible Settings: 0 – 44210000  
Default Setting: 44146000  
Allows you to display or change the DLCI’s excess burst size, in bits.  
0 – maximum burst size – Specifies the maximum amount of data over the committed  
burst size that the network will attempt to deliver within the committed rate measurement  
interval (Tc).  
DLCI Priority  
Possible Settings: Low, Medium, High  
Default Setting: High  
Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device  
(also known as quality of service). All data on user data Port 1 is cut-through, as long as  
there is no higher-priority data queued from another user port. The DLCI priority set for  
an interface applies to data coming into that interface. For example, the priority set for  
DLCIs on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment (such  
as a router). This option has no effect when there is only one user data port.  
Display Conditions – This option is not available for the network interface or for Model  
9820-45M.  
Low – Data configured for the DLCI has low priority.  
Medium – Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority.  
High – Data configured for the DLCI has high priority.  
Outbound Management Priority  
Possible Settings: Low, Medium, High  
Default Setting: Medium  
Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this  
DLCI to the network.  
Display Conditions – This option is not available on a user data port or for Model  
9820-45M.  
Low – Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority.  
Medium – Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority.  
High – Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring PVC Connections  
The Auto-Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections  
and their DLCI Records. PVC Connections can also be created manually  
(see Table 4-9).  
Main Menu Configuration PVC Connections  
From this screen, you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by  
selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens.  
Quick removal of unused DLCIs included in an existing PVC Connection, except  
for HQ_Site, is also available when the Delete function key is selected and you  
respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated  
with the deleted PVC?prompt.  
Table 4-9. PVC Connection Options (1 of 3)  
Source Link  
Possible Settings: Port-1, NET1-FR1  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection; the from end of a  
from-to link. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay  
interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC  
connection or management link. For example, if Port-1 has no DLCIs defined, Port-1  
would not appear as a valid setting.  
Port-1 – Specifies the user data port as the source link.  
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the Network interface or network data port as the source link.  
Clear All – Clears all Link and DLCI settings, and suppresses EDLCIs.  
Source DLCI  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be defined and  
cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed DLCIs, at least  
one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.  
NOTE: Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.  
Source EDLCI  
Possible Settings: 0 – 62  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for a frame  
relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a  
multiplexed DLCI record number.  
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-9. PVC Connection Options (2 of 3)  
Primary Destination Link  
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the frame relay interface used as the primary destination link; the to end of a  
from-to link. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay  
interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC  
connection or management link. For example, if the network data port has no DLCIs  
defined, this interface would not appear as a valid setting.  
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the network data port as the destination link.  
Primary Destination DLCI  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be  
defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed  
DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.  
NOTE: Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains  
no value.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.  
Primary Destination EDLCI  
Possible Settings: 0 – 62  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for  
a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a  
connection.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLCI  
contains a multiplexed DLCI record number.  
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.  
Alternate Destination Link  
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the frame relay interface used as the alternate destination link if the Primary  
Destination Link fails. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay  
interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC  
connection or management link. For example, if the network data port has no DLCIs  
defined, this interface would not appear as a valid setting.  
Display Conditions – This option appears only for Model 9820-45M.  
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the network data port as the destination link.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-9. PVC Connection Options (3 of 3)  
AlternateDestination DLCI  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the alternate destination DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be  
defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed  
DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.  
NOTE: Alternate Destination DLCI has no value if Alternate Destination Link  
contains no value.  
Display Conditions – This option appears only for Model 9820-45M.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.  
Alternate Destination EDLCI  
Possible Settings: 0 – 62  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the alternate destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI)  
for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a  
connection.  
Display Conditions – This option appears only for Model 9820-45M, only when the  
Alternate Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number.  
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Setting Up Management and Communication Options  
The following options can be selected from the Management and Communication  
menu:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Node IP Options  
Management PVC Options  
General SNMP Management Options  
Telnet and FTP Sessions Options  
SNMP NMS Security Options  
SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options  
Ethernet Port Options (Model 9820-45M)  
Communication Port Options  
External Modem (COM Port) Options (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
Modem Port Options (Model 9820-45M)  
Configuring Node IP Information  
Select Node IP to display, add, or change the information necessary to support  
general IP communications for the node (see Table 4-10). When deploying units  
to remote sites, minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication Node IP  
This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting (TS) Management  
Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their  
networks. This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link.  
Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations.  
No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the  
customer.  
TS_Management_Link is initially disabled in most models, but the link can be  
enabled at any time. Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard  
DLCI can be used. When enabled, a troubleshooting link can be accessed any  
time the service provider requests access. An assigned security level can also  
control access.  
When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link, the  
link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry  
screen with the This PVC has been designated as the TS  
Management Linkmessage.  
NOTE:  
The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already  
set up (e.g., 980).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-10. Node IP Options (1 of 3)  
Node IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies the IP address needed to access the node. Since an IP address is not bound  
to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.  
On the Model 9820-45M, this address may be shared only among management PVCs.  
On Models 9820, 9820-2M, and 9820-8M this address may also be used to access the  
COM port.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the node, which can be  
viewed or edited.  
Clear – Fills the node IP address with zeros.  
Node Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node. Since the subnet mask is not  
bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the node, which can  
be viewed or edited.  
Clear – Fills the node subnet mask with zeros. When the node’s subnet mask is  
all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the  
IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C:  
255.255.255.000.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-10. Node IP Options (2 of 3)  
Default IP Destination  
Possible Settings (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M): None, COM, PVCname  
Possible Settings (Model 9820-45M): None, Modem, Ethernet, COM, PVCname  
Default Setting: None  
Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route.  
Examples:  
H If the default IP network is connected to the communications port, select COM.  
H If the default IP network is connected to a far-end device over the management PVC  
named London for the remote device located in the London office, select the PVC  
name London (as defined by the Name configuration option, Table 4-11,  
Management PVC Options).  
NOTE: If the link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes  
disabled or down, the unrouteable data will be discarded. Make sure that  
the link selected is operational, and if that link goes down, change the  
default destination.  
CAUTION: Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a  
subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS, router, LAN  
adapter, terminal server, etc. is connected. Communicating with an  
unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops,  
which will last 16 iterations times the retry count.  
None – No default network destination is specified. Unrouteable data will be discarded.  
This is the recommended setting.  
Modem – Specifies that the default destination is connected to the Modem port. Only  
appears when Port Use is set to Net Link (see Table 4-19, Modem Port Options).  
Ethernet – Specifies that the default destination is connected to the Ethernet port (see  
Table 4-16, Ethernet Port Options).  
COM – Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM (Terminal) port.  
Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link (see Table 4-17, Communication Port  
Options).  
PVCname – Specifies a name for the management PVC. Only appears when a  
management PVC name is defined for the node. For example, when the network is  
connected to a remote device located in the London office, London can be specified as  
the PVC name, which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located  
in London. London would appear as one of the available selections.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-10. Node IP Options (3 of 3)  
TS Management Link  
Available Settings: None, PVCname  
Default Setting: None  
Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service  
providers.  
If the option is changed from the management PVC name to None, the Delete the  
Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record?prompt  
appears. If you select:  
H No – The link designation is removed and the option is set to None.  
H Yes – The link designation is removed and the option is set to None, and the link  
and its DLCI will be deleted.  
None – Disables or does not specify a TS Management Link.  
PVCname – Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC.  
Display Conditions – This selection only appears when a dedicated Management  
PVC has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set  
to Standard.  
TS Management Link Access Level  
Available Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3  
Default Setting: Level-1  
Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP  
session when the service provider is using the TS Management Link.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when TS Management Link is set  
to None.  
NOTES: Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level  
set by the Session Access Level, Login Required, or FTP Login Required  
option settings (see Table 4-13, Telnet and FTP Session Options).  
Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session,  
Inactivity Timeout, Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings.  
Level-1 – Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability  
to view unit information, change configuration options, and run tests. This is the highest  
access level allowed. Use this setting when downloading files.  
Level-2 – Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability  
to view unit information and run tests only; they cannot change configuration options.  
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view  
unit information only; they cannot change configuration options or run tests.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring Management PVCs  
Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or  
changing Management PVCs (see Table 4-11). First, DLCI records must have  
been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside. See  
Manually Configuring DLCI Records for additional information.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Management PVCs  
Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs.  
H
H
When you select New, the configuration option field is blank.  
When you select Modify, the values displayed for all fields are based on the  
PVC ID number that you specified.  
From this screen, you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting  
the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens.  
Select the Delete function key, a Management PVC ID#, and respond Yes to the  
Remove otherwise unused components associated with the  
deleted PVC?prompt for quick removal of unused DLCIs. If the Management  
PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination, a Default IP  
Destination, or a TS Management Link, an ... Are You Sure?prompt appears  
to warn you.  
Table 4-11. Management PVC Options (1 of 4)  
Name  
Possible Settings: ASCII Text Entry  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens  
(e.g., London for the London office).  
Enter a unique name for the management PVC (maximum length 8 characters).  
Intf IP Address  
Possible Settings: Node-IP-Address, Special (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)  
Default Setting: Node-IP-Address  
Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC, providing  
connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network.  
Node-IP-Address – Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address (see  
Table 4-10, Node IP Options).  
Special (001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255) – Allows you to display/edit an IP  
address for the unit’s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is  
different from the node’s IP address.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-11. Management PVC Options (2 of 4)  
Intf Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: Node-Subnet-Mask, Calculate, Special (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)  
Default Setting: Node-Subnet-Mask  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is  
providing connectivity to an external IP network (through frame relay) that requires a  
specific subnet mask for the interface.  
Node-Subnet-Mask – Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node-Subnet  
Mask configuration option (see Table 4-10, Node IP Options).  
Calculate – Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class  
of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or  
Class C: 255.255.255.000). Cannot be displayed or edited.  
Special (000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255) – Allows you to edit/display the subnet  
mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface. A  
text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this unit’s management  
PVC.  
Set DE  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether frames (packets) sent on a management PVC have the Discard  
Eligible (DE) bit set. This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard  
first during periods of network congestion. This allows management traffic to be viewed  
as lower priority than customer data.  
Enable – Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC.  
Disable – Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC. This is  
the recommended setting, particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service.  
Primary Link  
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1, Port-1, Clear  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC. The interface  
selected must have at least one DLCI (or DLCI with EDLCI) defined, which is not part of  
a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC.  
Net1-FR1 – Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection.  
Port-1 – Specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the  
connection.  
Clear – (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M.) Clears the link and the DLCI field, and  
suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-11. Management PVC Options (3 of 4)  
Primary DLCI  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay  
interface is selected.  
The DLCI must be defined for the link (i.e., has a DLCI record), and it must not be part  
of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC. For multiplexed  
DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI.  
NOTES: – DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank.  
– Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).  
Primary EDLCI  
Possible Settings: 0 – 62  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is  
selected. EDLCIs identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCIs that are  
unique to those DLCIs.  
Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI.  
Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI. Use 1 – 62 to identify secondary EDLCIs. Use the  
primary EDLCI for customer data, which has a higher utilization rate than management  
data, with slightly less line overhead.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference  
a multiplexed DLCI.  
NOTE: Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI  
field.  
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number (inclusive).  
Primary Link RIP  
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary, Standard_out  
Default Setting:  
For multiplexed DLCIs: Proprietary  
For nonmultiplexed DLCIs: Standard_out  
For Model 9820-45M: None  
Specifies which Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of  
management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment.  
None – Does not use a routing protocol.  
Proprietary – (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M.) Uses a proprietary variant of RIP  
version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units. A  
FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link. This is the factory default for  
management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCIs (see Table 4-8, DLCI Record  
Options).  
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing  
information only about other FrameSaver SLV units in the network. This is the factory  
default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCIs.  
NOTE: The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the  
FrameSaver unit for the management interface (e.g., Cisco: config-t,  
router RIP, int serialx, IP RIP Receive version 1,  
ctl-z WR). See Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-11. Management PVC Options (4 of 4)  
Alternate Link  
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the alternate frame relay interface to use for this management PVC if the  
primary link has failed. The interface selected must have at least one DLCI (or DLCI  
with EDLCI) defined, which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a  
management PVC.  
Display Conditions – This option appears only for Model 9820-45M.  
Net1-FR1 – Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection.  
Alternate DLCI  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the alternate DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame  
relay interface is selected and the primary link has failed.  
The DLCI must be defined for the link (i.e., has a DLCI record), and it must not be part  
of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC. For multiplexed  
DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI.  
Display Conditions – This option appears only for Model 9820-45M.  
NOTES: – DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank.  
– Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).  
Alternate EDLCI  
Possible Settings: 0 – 62  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the alternate EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed  
DLCI is selected and the primary link has failed. EDLCIs identify individual connections  
within multiplexed DLCIs that are unique to those DLCIs.  
Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI.  
Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI. Use 1 – 62 to identify secondary EDLCIs. Use the  
primary EDLCI for customer data, which has a higher utilization rate than management  
data, with slightly less line overhead.  
Display Conditions – This option appears only for Model 9820-45M, and only if the  
DLCI field references a multiplexed DLCI.  
NOTE: Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI  
field.  
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number (inclusive).  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring General SNMP Management  
Select General SNMP Management to add, change, or delete the information  
needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the  
NMS supporting the SNMP protocols (see Table 4-12).  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management  
Table 4-12. General SNMP Management Options  
SNMP Management  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an  
SNMP-compatible NMS.  
Enable – Can be managed as an SNMP agent.  
Disable – Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent. The FrameSaver unit will not  
respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps.  
Community Name 1  
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear  
Default Setting: Public in ASCII text field  
Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the  
FrameSaver unit’s MIB. The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP  
manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.  
ASCII text entry – Adds to or changes Community Name 1 (maximum 255 characters).  
Clear – Clears Community Name 1.  
Name 1 Access  
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write  
Default Setting: Read/Write  
Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB. This is the type of access  
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1.  
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command). This includes all objects  
specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.  
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP get and set commands).  
Community Name 2  
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear  
Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the  
FrameSaver unit’s MIB. The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP  
manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.  
ASCII text entry – Adds to or changes Community Name 2 (maximum 255 characters).  
Clear – Clears Community Name 2.  
Name 2 Access  
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write  
Default Setting: Read  
Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB. This is the type of access  
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2.  
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command). This includes all objects  
specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.  
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP get and set commands).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support  
Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP (File Transport Protocol)  
session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security  
applicable to the session. Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time  
(see Table 4-13).  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Telnet and FTP Session  
When a TS Management Link has been set up and activated, the following  
options have no effect upon the PVC:  
H
H
H
Telnet Login Required  
Session Access Level  
FTP Login Required  
Table 4-13. Telnet and FTP Session Options (1 of 3)  
Telnet Session  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet  
client on an interconnected IP network.  
Enable – Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client.  
Disable – Does not allow Telnet sessions.  
Telnet Login Required  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) are required to  
access the menu-driven user interface via a Telnet session. If required, the login used is  
the same login used for an menu-driven user interface session. This option does not  
affect the TS Management Link.  
Enable – Requires a login to access a Telnet session.  
Disable – Does not require a login.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-13. Telnet and FTP Session Options (2 of 3)  
Session Access Level  
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3  
Default Setting: Level-1  
Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu-driven user  
interface via a Telnet session. If a login is required for the session, the effective access  
level is also determined by the user’s access level. When a login is not required, the  
effective access level is determined by this option. This option does not affect the TS  
Management Link.  
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the  
session or the user. For example, if the assigned Session Access Level is  
Level-2, but the User Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access is  
allowed for the session.  
Level-1 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with  
the capability to view system information, change configuration options, and run tests.  
This is the highest access level allowed.  
CAUTION: Before changing the session access level to Level-2 or 3, make sure that  
the COM (Terminal) port’s Port Access Level is set to Level-1 and that at  
least one Login ID is set to Level-1. Otherwise, access will be lost. If this  
occurs, you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the  
configuration process again. A reset is required if the Communication  
Port’s Port Use option is set to Net Link (see Table 4-12, General  
System Options).  
Level-2 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with  
the capability to view system information and run tests only; they cannot change  
configuration options.  
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with  
the capability to view system information only; they cannot change configuration options  
or run tests.  
Inactivity Timeout  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of  
keyboard inactivity.  
Enable Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires.  
Disable – Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity.  
Disconnect Time (Minutes)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 60  
Default Setting: 10  
Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is  
disconnected.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled.  
1 – 60 – Up to an hour can be set.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-13. Telnet and FTP Session Options (3 of 3)  
FTP Session  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP (file transfer  
protocol) client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session. This option  
must be enabled when downloading files.  
Enable – Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client.  
Disable – Does not allow FTP sessions.  
FTP Login Required  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session. If required,  
the login used is the same login used for a menu-driven user interface session. This  
option does not affect the TS Management Link.  
Enable – User is prompted for a login ID and password.  
Disable – No login is required for an FTP session.  
FTP Max Receive Rate (kbps)  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820:  
Possible Settings: 1 – 128  
Default Setting: 128  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-2M:  
Possible Settings: 1 – 2048  
Default Setting: 2048  
For FrameSaver SLV 9820-8M:  
Possible Settings: 1 – 8192  
Default Setting: 8192  
Sets the maximum receive rate of file transfer to the system. This option allows new  
software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without  
interfering with normal operation. Using this option, new software and configuration files  
can be downloaded quickly using the default settings, or at a slower rate over an  
extended period of time by selecting a slower speed. Based upon TCP flow control, the  
FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M, which has a  
fixed rate.  
1 – maximum receive rate – Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to  
the maximum management speed.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring SNMP NMS Security  
Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to  
display, add, or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver  
unit to set up trap managers (see Table 4-14).  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
SNMP NMS Security  
A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by  
IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP.  
Table 4-14. SNMP NMS Security Options  
NMS IP Validation  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP  
management systems attempting to access the node. Only allows access when the  
sending manager’s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen.  
Enable – Performs security checks.  
Disable – Does not perform security checks.  
Number of Managers  
Possible Settings: 1 – 10  
Default Setting: 1  
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send  
SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit. An IP address must be configured for each  
management system allowed to send messages. Configure IP addresses in the NMS n  
IP Address configuration option.  
1 – 10 – Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers.  
NMS n IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP  
messages to the unit. If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and  
its IP address cannot be matched here, access is denied and an authenticationFailure  
trap is generated. If a match is found, the type of access (read-only or read/write) is  
determined by the corresponding Access Type.  
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the  
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the NMS IP address.  
Clear – Fills the NMS IP address with zeros.  
Access Type  
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write  
Default Setting: Read  
Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation  
is performed.  
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the  
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.  
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command) to the MIB objects. This  
includes all objects specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.  
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set commands) to the MIB  
objects. However, access for all read-only objects is specified as read-only.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out  
Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to  
configure SNMP traps and dial-out when a trap is generated (see Table 4-15).  
Dial-out is not available on the Model 9820-45M.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
SNMP Traps  
See Appendix B, SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults, for trap  
format standards and special trap features, including RMON-specific traps, and  
the default settings that will generate RMON-specific SNMP traps.  
Table 4-15. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (1 of 5)  
SNMP Traps  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently  
configured SNMP trap manager(s).  
Enable – Sends trap messages.  
Disable – Does not send trap messages.  
Number of Trap Managers  
Possible Settings: 1 – 6  
Default Setting: 1  
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap  
messages from the FrameSaver unit. An NMS IP Address must be configured in the  
NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap  
messages.  
1 – 6 – Specifies the number of trap managers (inclusive).  
NMS n IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager(s) to receive SNMP traps.  
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the  
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap  
manager.  
Clear – Fills the NMS IP address with zeros.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-15. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (2 of 5)  
Initial Route Destination  
Possible Settings: AutoRoute, COM, PVCname  
Default Setting: AutoRoute  
Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager. When proprietary  
RIP is active, only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management  
link as the initial destination. All other units can use the default setting.  
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the  
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.  
AutoRoute – Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route  
for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager, or the Default IP Destination when no  
route is available in the routing table (see Table 4-10, Node IP Options).  
Modem – (Model 9820-45M.) Uses the Modem port. This selection is only available  
when Port Use is set to Net Link (see Table 4-19, Modem Port Options).  
Ethernet – (Model 9820-45M.) Uses the Ethernet port. This selection only appears  
when the Ethernet port is enabled (see Table 4-16, Ethernet Port Options).  
COM – Uses the COM (Terminal) port. This selection is only available when Port Use is  
set to Net Link (see Table 4-17, Communication Port Options).  
PVCname – Uses the defined management linkname (the name given the Management  
PVC). This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for  
the node.  
General Traps  
Possible Settings: Disable, Warm, AuthFail, Both  
Default Setting: Both  
Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and/or authenticationFailure  
events are sent to the currently configured trap manager(s).  
Disable – Does not send trap messages for these events.  
Warm – Sends trap messages for warmStart events only.  
AuthFail – Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only.  
Both – Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events.  
Enterprise Specific Traps  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting:  
Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M: Disable  
Model 9820-45M: Enable  
Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the  
currently configured trap manager(s).  
Enable – Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.  
Disable – Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-15. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (3 of 5)  
Link Traps  
Possible Settings: Disable, Up, Down, Both  
Default Setting: Both  
Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured  
trap manager(s). A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of  
the interfaces. A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces  
is active.  
Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to  
specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages.  
Disable – Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages.  
Up – Sends trap messages for linkUp events only.  
Down – Sends trap messages for linkDown events only.  
Both – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events.  
Link Traps Interfaces  
Possible Settings: Network, Ports, All  
Default Setting: All  
Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific trap  
messages. These traps are not supported on the COM (Terminal) port.  
Network – Generates these trap messages on the network interface only.  
Ports – Generates these trap messages for linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific  
events on the user data port only.  
All – Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all  
interfaces, except for the COM (Terminal) port, that are applicable to the FrameSaver  
model.  
DLCI Traps on Interfaces  
Possible Settings: Network, Ports, All, None  
Default Setting: All  
Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for  
individual DLCIs. These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces.  
Network – Generates these trap messages on DLCIs for the network interface only.  
Ports – Generates these trap messages for DLCIs on a user data port only.  
All – Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces.  
None – (Model 9820-45M.) No linkUp and linkDown trap messages are generated.  
RMON Traps  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap  
manager(s). RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups  
of RMON1 when a selected variable’s configured threshold is exceeded.  
Enable – Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded.  
Disable – Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-15. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (4 of 5)  
Trap Dial-Out  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Controls whether SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically. If the call cannot be  
completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable, the SNMP trap message is held  
(queued) until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M.  
Enable – Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu’s Modem  
Call Directories, Directory Number A (Alarm).  
Disable – Automatic calls will not be initiated. Traps sent to the modem are held until a  
dial-in connection is established.  
Trap Disconnect  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether the COM port-connected modem disconnects after the SNMP trap  
message has been sent. This configuration option only applies to modem connections  
initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M.  
Enable – Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message(s).  
Disable – Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected  
manually or by the remote modem. This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for  
more information after receiving an SNMP trap.  
Call Retry  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
If an alternate dial-out directory is specified (see Alternate Dial-Out Directory), the alarm  
directory’s telephone number is called first. If the call cannot be completed, then the  
alternate directory’s telephone number is called (see the Control menu’s Modem Call  
Directories).  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M.  
Enable – Attempts to retry the call, up to one time per SNMP trap message, with a  
delay between the retry. The delay is specified by the Dial-Out Delay Time (Min)  
configuration option.  
Disable – Does not retry an incomplete call.  
Dial-Out Delay TIme (Min)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 10  
Default Setting: 5  
Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent;  
the wait between call attempts (see Call Retry).  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M.  
1 – 10 – Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts  
(inclusive).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-15. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (5 of 5)  
Alternate Dial-Out Directory  
Possible Settings: None, 1 – 5  
Default Setting: None  
Specifies whether an incomplete call (busy, or no answer, etc.) resulting from an attempt  
to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number. Up to  
5 alternate call directories can be set up, but only one at a time can be used.  
When Call Retry is enabled, the alarm directory’s telephone number is called first. If the  
call cannot be completed after one additional try, then the specified alternate directory’s  
telephone number is called.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for Model 9820-45M.  
None – Does not dial-out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers.  
1 – 5 – Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call  
cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory (Directory  
Number A in the Control menu’s Modem Call Directories), inclusive.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring the Ethernet Port (Model 9820-45M)  
Select Ethernet Port from the Management and Communication menu to display  
or change the Ethernet port configuration options (see Table 4-16).  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Ethernet Port  
The Ethernet port is initially disabled. When Interface Status is changed to  
Enable, the message Would you like to set the Node’s Default IP  
Destination to Ethernet?appears. Answer Yes if you intend to access  
devices through the Ethernet port that are on a different subnet.  
Table 4-16. Ethernet Port Options (1 of 2)  
Interface Status  
Available Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether the interface is available for use.  
Enable – The interface is enabled.  
Disable – The interface is disabled. No alarms or traps associated with the Ethernet port  
will be generated, and any uses of the interface (such as Default IP Destination) are  
reset to their default values.  
IP Address  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the Ethernet port.  
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the Ethernet port,  
which you can view or edit. The first three digits may not be 127.  
Clear – Clears the IP address for the Ethernet port and fills the address with zeros.  
Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the Ethernet port,  
which you can view or edit.  
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the Ethernet port and fills the address with zeros.  
When the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask  
based upon the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000,  
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-16. Ethernet Port Options (2 of 2)  
Default Gateway Address  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies an address for packets sent out the Ethernet port that do not have a route.  
000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the Default Gateway Address, which you  
can view or edit. The first three digits may not be 127.  
Clear – Clears the Default Gateway Address to 000.000.000.000. Packets without  
routes are discarded.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring the Communication Port  
Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to  
display or change the COM port (Terminal port on the Model 9820-45M)  
configuration options (see Table 4-17).  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Communication Port  
Table 4-17. Communication Port Options (1 of 5)  
Port Use  
Possible Settings: Terminal, Net Link  
Default Setting: Terminal  
Assigns a specific use to the COM (Terminal) port.  
NOTE: If the Default IP Destination is set to COM (see Table 4-10, Node IP  
Options) and you change Port Use to Terminal, the Default IP Destination  
is forced to None.  
Terminal – The COM (Terminal) port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection.  
Net Link – The COM (Terminal) port is the network communications link to the  
IP network or IP device port.  
NOTE: If the COM port configured for Net Link is used to connect to an external  
modem, there is a potential security risk of an unauthorized user gaining  
access to the NMS or other devices on the LAN for which this device has  
routing table entries.  
Data Rate (Kbps)  
Possible Settings: 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2  
Default Setting: 19.2  
Specifies the rate for the COM (Terminal) port in kilobits per second.  
9.6 – 115.2 kbps – Sets the communication port speed. The 57.6 and 115.2 speeds are  
not available on the Model 9820-45M.  
Character Length  
Possible Settings: 7, 8  
Default Setting: 8  
Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character.  
NOTE: Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to  
Net Link.  
7 – Sets the character length to seven bits.  
8 – Sets the character length to eight bits. Use this setting if using the COM port as the  
network communication link.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-17. Communication Port Options (2 of 5)  
Parity  
Possible Settings: None, Even, Odd  
Default Setting: None  
Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM (Terminal)  
port. A parity bit is added to the data to make the “1” bits of each character add up to  
either an odd or even number. Each character of transmitted data is approved as  
error-free if the “1” bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this  
configuration option.  
None – Provides no parity.  
Even – Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even.  
Odd – Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd.  
Stop Bits  
Possible Settings: 1, 2  
Default Setting: 1  
Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM (Terminal) port.  
1 – Provides one stop bit.  
2 – Provides two stop bits.  
Ignore Control Leads  
Possible Settings: Disable, DTR  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether DTR is used.  
Disable – Treats control leads as standard operation.  
DTR – Ignores DTR. This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices.  
Login Required  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) is required in  
order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM (Terminal) port.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Enable – Requires a login to access the menu-driven user interface.  
Disable – Does not requires a login.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-17. Communication Port Options (3 of 5)  
Port Access Level  
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3  
Default Setting: Level-1  
Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the  
COM (Terminal) port. If a login is required for the port, the effective access level is  
determined by the user’s access level. When a login is not required, the effective access  
level is determined by this option.  
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the  
port or the user. For example, if the Port Access Level assigned is Level-2,  
but the User Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access will be  
permitted for the port.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Level-1 – Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring, diagnostics,  
and configuration. The user can add, change, and display configuration options, and  
perform device testing.  
CAUTION: Before changing the communication port’s access level to Level-2 or 3,  
make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level-1 and at  
least one Login ID is set to Level-1. Otherwise, access will be lost. If this  
occurs, you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the  
configuration process again.  
Level-2 – Allows limited access and control of the device. The user can monitor and  
perform diagnostics, display status and configuration option information.  
Level-3 – Allows limited access with monitoring control only. The user can monitor and  
display status and configuration screens only.  
Inactivity Timeout  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity  
(no keyboard activity).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Enable – Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity.  
Disable – Does not disconnect user session.  
Disconnect Time (Minutes)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 60  
Default Setting: 10  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is  
disconnected.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
1 – 60 – Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes (inclusive).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-17. Communication Port Options (4 of 5)  
IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM (Terminal) port. Only in  
effect when the COM (Terminal) port is configured as a network communication link  
(Port Use option is set to Net Link).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the COM (Terminal)  
port, which you can view or edit.  
Clear – Clears the IP address for the COM (Terminal) port and fills the address with  
zeros. For Models 9820, 9820-2M, and 9820-8M, when the IP Address is all zeros, the  
COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured.  
Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit. Only in effect when the COM  
(Terminal) port is configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to  
Net Link).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the COM (Terminal)  
port, which you can view or edit.  
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the COM (Terminal) port and fills the address with  
zeros. When the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet  
mask based upon the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000,  
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.  
Link Protocol  
Possible Settings: PPP, SLIP  
Default Setting: PPP  
Specifies the link-layer protocol to be used. Only in effect when the COM port is  
configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to Net Link).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link. This  
option does not appear for Model 9820-45M, for which the Link Protocol is PPP.  
PPP – Point-to-Point Protocol.  
SLIP – Serial-Line Internet Protocol.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-17. Communication Port Options (5 of 5)  
RIP  
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary, Standard_out  
Default Setting: None  
Specifies which Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of  
management data between devices.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
None – No routing is used.  
Proprietary – (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M.) A proprietary variant of RIP version 1  
is used to communicate routing information only between devices to enable routing of  
IP traffic.  
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing  
information about other FrameSaver units in the network. Standard RIP messages  
received on this link are ignored.  
NOTE: The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the  
COM (Terminal) port, configured as the management interface (e.g., Cisco:  
config-t, router RIP, int serialx, IP RIP Receive  
version 1, ctl-z WR).  
To create this management interface, make sure that Node or COM  
(Terminal) port IP Information has been set up (Configuring Node IP  
Information).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
For all models except Model 9820-45M, select External Modem (Com Port) to  
display or change the configuration options that control call processing for an  
external device attached to the COM port (see Table 4-18).  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
External Modem (Com Port)  
NOTE:  
A standard EIA-232-D crossover cable is required when connecting an  
external modem to the FrameSaver unit’s COM Port. See Standard  
EIA-232-D Crossover Cable in Appendix C, Connectors, Cables, and Pin  
Assignments, for cable pin assignments.  
Table 4-18. External Modem (COM Port) Options (1 of 2)  
External Modem Commands  
Possible Settings: Disable, AT  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies the type of commands to be sent over the COM port.  
Disable – Commands will not be sent over the COM port.  
AT – Standard Attention (AT) Commands are sent over the COM port to control the  
external device. All AT command strings will end with a carriage return (hex 0x0D) and a  
line feed (hex 0x0A).  
CAUTION: Do not use this setting if you have an asynchronous terminal connected  
to the COM port.  
Dial-In Access  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Controls whether external devices can dial-in to the FrameSaver unit through the COM  
port (based on the Port Use option setting).  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is  
disabled.  
Enable – Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or  
IP network.  
Disable – Does not answer incoming calls.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-18. External Modem (COM Port) Options (2 of 2)  
Alternate IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies the Alternate IP Address for the COM port when the alternate phone directory  
is used. If this configuration option is not configured (i.e., it is zero), the COM port’s  
primary IP Address is used when the alternate telephone directory is used.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is  
set to AT. Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network  
communication link (Port Use is set to Net Link, see Table 3-15, Communication Port  
Options).  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the COM port’s Alternate IP Address,  
which you can view or edit. The first byte (i.e., nnn.255.255.255) can be any number  
from 001 through 223, excluding 127. Remaining bytes (i.e., 223.nnn.nnn.nnn) can be  
any number from 000 through 255. Leading zeros are required.  
Clear – Clears the Alternate IP Address for the COM port and fills the address with  
zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000).  
Alternate Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the Alternate Subnet Mask for the COM port when the alternate phone  
directory is used.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is  
set to AT. Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network  
communication link (Port Use is set to Net Link, see Table 4-17, Communication Port  
Options).  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the COM port, which  
you can view or edit.  
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros  
(i.e., 000.000.000.000). When the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates  
a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address:  
Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Configuring the Modem Port (Model 9820-45M)  
Select Modem Port from the Management and Communication menu to display  
or change the Modem port configuration options (see Table 4-19).  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Modem Port  
Table 4-19. Modem Port Options (1 of 3)  
Port Use  
Possible Settings: Terminal, Net Link  
Default Setting: Terminal  
Assigns a specific use to the Modem port.  
NOTE: If the Default IP Destination is set to Modem (see Table 4-10, Node IP  
Options) and you change Port Use to Terminal, the Default IP Destination  
is forced to None.  
Terminal – The Modem port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection.  
Net Link – The Modem port is the network communications link to the IP network or  
IP device port.  
Dial-In Access  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether dial-in access to the Modem port is allowed.  
Enable – Dial-in access is permitted. Port Use must be set to Terminal.  
Disable – Dial-in access is not permitted.  
Login Required  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) is required in  
order to log on to the asynchronous terminal interface through the Modem port.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Enable – Requires a login to access the menu-driven user interface.  
Disable – Does not requires a login.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-19. Modem Port Options (2 of 3)  
Port Access Level  
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3  
Default Setting: Level-1  
Specifies level of user access privilege for the asynchronous terminal interface  
accessed through the Modem port. If a login is required for the port, the effective access  
level is determined by the user’s access level. When a login is not required, the effective  
access level is determined by this option.  
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the  
port or the user. For example, if the Port Access Level assigned is Level-2,  
but the User Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access will be  
permitted for the port.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Level-1 – Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring, diagnostics,  
and configuration. The user can add, change, and display configuration options, and  
perform device testing.  
CAUTION: Before changing the communication port’s access level to Level-2 or 3,  
make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level-1 and at  
least one Login ID is set to Level-1. Otherwise, access will be lost. If this  
occurs, you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the  
configuration process again.  
Level-2 – Allows limited access and control of the device. The user can monitor and  
perform diagnostics, display status and configuration option information.  
Level-3 – Allows limited access with monitoring control only. The user can monitor and  
display status and configuration screens only.  
Inactivity Timeout  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity  
(no keyboard activity).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Enable – Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity.  
Disable – Does not disconnect user session.  
Disconnect Time (Minutes)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 60  
Default Setting: 10  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is  
disconnected.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
1 – 60 – Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes (inclusive).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
Table 4-19. Modem Port Options (3 of 3)  
IP Address  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the Modem port. Only in effect  
when the Modem port is configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is  
set to Net Link).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the Modem port, which  
you can view or edit. The first three digits may not be 127.  
Clear – Clears the IP address for the Modem port and fills the address with zeros.  
Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit. Only in effect when the COM  
(Terminal) port is configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to  
Net Link).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the COM (Terminal)  
port, which you can view or edit.  
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the COM (Terminal) port and fills the address with  
zeros. When the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet  
mask based upon the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000,  
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Options  
This page intentionally left blank.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
4-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security and Logins  
5
This chapter includes the following:  
H
H
H
Limiting Access  
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access  
Controlling External COM Port Device Access (Models 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M)  
H
H
Controlling Modem Port Device Access (Model 9820-45M)  
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access  
Limiting Telnet Access  
Limiting FTP Access  
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link  
Controlling SNMP Access  
H
Disabling SNMP Access  
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels  
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses  
Creating a Login  
H
H
H
Modifying a Login  
Deleting a Login  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting Access  
The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces:  
H
H
H
H
H
Asynchronous (async) terminal  
External devices  
Telnet  
FTP  
SNMP  
Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time; that is, you  
can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions, or one Telnet session and one active  
asynchronous terminal session, or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal  
sessions.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security and Logins  
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access  
Asynchronous terminal access to the menu-driven user interface can be limited  
by:  
H
H
Requiring a login.  
Assigning an access level to the port or interface.  
" Procedure  
To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu-driven user interface:  
1. Select the appropriate configuration options screen.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Communication Port  
or (for Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
External Modem (COM Port)  
or (for Model 9820-45M)  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Modem Port  
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Require a login  
Login Required to Enable.  
NOTE: User ID and password combinations must be  
defined. See Creating a Login.  
Limit the effective access Port Access Level to Level-2 or Level-3.  
level to Level-3 or  
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access level, a user  
Level-2  
cannot operate at a level higher than the access level  
specified for the port (e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login  
and Level-2 port access has been set, the Level-1 user  
can only operate as a Level-2 user).  
If you are going to allow Level-1 users to configure the  
unit, keep the access at Level-1.  
3. Save your changes.  
See Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for information about the COM port  
(Terminal port on the Model 9820-45M), external modem, and Modem port  
configuration options.  
If you inadvertently configure the unit in such a way that communication is no  
longer possible, see Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in  
Chapter 8, Troubleshooting.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Controlling External COM Port Device Access  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
Dial-in access can be controlled on Models 9820, 9820-2M, and 9820-8M when  
an external device (modem) is connected to the unit’s communication (COM)  
port. The External Device Commands option must be set to AT or Other.  
" Procedure  
To control dial-in access:  
1. Select the External Modem options.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
External Modem (Com Port)  
2. Enable or disable the Dial-In Access configuration option.  
This option only appears when the External Device Commands option is set  
to AT or Other.  
3. Save your change.  
See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem in Chapter 4,  
Configuration Options, for more information about external device communication  
port configuration options.  
Controlling Modem Port Device Access  
(Model 9820-45M)  
Dial-in access through the Modem port can be controlled on the  
Model 9820-45M.  
" Procedure  
To control dial-in access:  
1. Select the Modem Port Options.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Modem Port  
2. Enable or disable the Dial-In Access configuration option.  
3. Save your change.  
See Configuring the Modem Port in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for more  
information about Modem port configuration options.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access  
The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or  
FTP session. Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on  
a service provider’s troubleshooting (TS) management link.  
Limiting Telnet Access  
Telnet access can be limited by:  
H
H
Disabling Telnet access completely.  
Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Management  
Link.  
H
H
Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions.  
Disabling TS Management Link access.  
To limit Telnet access via a service provider’s troubleshooting management link,  
see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link.  
" Procedure  
To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link:  
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Telnet and FTP Sessions  
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Telnet Session to Disable.  
Disable Telnet access  
Require a login  
Login Required to Enable.  
NOTE: User ID and password combinations  
must be defined. See Creating a Login.  
Assign an access level  
Session Access Level to Level-2 or Level-3.  
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access  
level, a user cannot operate at a level higher  
than the access level specified for the Telnet  
session (e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login and  
Level-2 telnet access has been set, the  
Level-1 user can only operate as a Level-2  
user).  
If you are going to allow users to configure the  
unit, keep the access at Level-1.  
3. Save your changes.  
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support in Chapter 4, Configuration  
Options, for more information about setting Telnet configuration options.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting FTP Access  
FTP access can be limited by:  
H
H
H
Disabling FTP access completely.  
Requiring a user ID and password to login.  
Limiting FTP bandwidth. (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M.)  
" Procedure  
To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link:  
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Telnet and FTP Sessions  
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
FTP Session to Disable.  
Disable FTP  
Require a login  
Login Required to Enable.  
NOTE: User ID and password combinations  
must be defined. See Creating a Login.  
If you want to allow users to configure the unit  
or perform file transfers, including downloads,  
keep the access at Level-1.  
Level-1 access is required to download  
software to the unit, or to upload or download  
configuration files. Level-3 is sufficient for  
NMS access for SLV historical information.  
Limit bandwidth for FTP  
FTP Max Receive Rate to a rate less than the  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) network line speed, typically less than or  
equal to the CIR.  
This method is not recommended if SLV  
reports are desired since FTP is required to  
generate the reports.  
3. Save your changes.  
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support in Chapter 4, Configuration  
Options, for more information about setting FTP configuration options.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link  
" Procedure  
To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Management Link:  
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Telnet and FTP Sessions  
2. Disable Telnet Session and/or FTP Session, as appropriate.  
3. Return to the Management and Communication menu, and select Node IP.  
4. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Disable access via a  
TS Management Link  
TS Management Link to None.  
Assign an access level to the  
TS Management Link  
TS Management Access Level to Level-2  
or Level-3.  
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access  
level, a user cannot operate at a level higher  
than the access level specified for the session  
(e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login and Level-2  
telnet access has been set, the Level-1 user  
can only operate as a Level-2 user).  
If you are going to allow users to configure the  
unit, keep the access at Level-1.  
5. Save your changes.  
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP  
Information in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for more information about these  
configuration options.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Controlling SNMP Access  
The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1, which provides limited security  
through the use of community names. There are three methods for limiting SNMP  
access:  
H
H
H
Disabling SNMP access.  
Assigning SNMP community names and the access type.  
Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit.  
Disabling SNMP Access  
When the SNMP access is disabled, the FrameSaver unit will not respond to  
SNMP messages.  
" Procedure  
To disable SNMP access:  
1. Select the General SNMP Management options.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management  
2. Disable the SNMP Management option.  
3. Save your change.  
See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4, Configuration  
Options, for more information about General SNMP Management configuration  
options.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels  
The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an  
SNMP manager. SNMP manager access can be limited by:  
H
H
Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the  
FrameSaver unit’s Management Information Base (MIB).  
Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name.  
Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB, the  
community name must be supplied.  
" Procedure  
To assign SNMP community names and access types:  
1. Select the General SNMP Management options.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management  
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Assign SNMP community names  
Community Name 1 and Community Name 2  
to a community name text, up to 255  
characters in length.  
Assign the type of access allowed  
for the SNMP community names  
Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read  
or Read/Write.  
3. Save your changes.  
See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4, Configuration  
Options, for more information about General SNMP Management configuration  
options.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses  
An additional level of security is provided by:  
H
H
Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit.  
Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management  
systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit.  
H
Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address  
validation is performed.  
The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that  
determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP  
management systems attempting to communicate with the unit.  
Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable.  
Menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management SNMP Management: Enable  
See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4, Configuration  
Options, for more information about SNMP management configuration options.  
" Procedure  
To limit SNMP access through IP addresses:  
1. Select the SNMP NMS Security options:  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
SNMP NMS Security  
2. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Enable IP address checking  
NMS IP Validation to Enable.  
Specify the number (between 1  
and 10) of SNMP management  
systems that are authorized to  
send SNMP messages to the  
FrameSaver unit  
Number of Managers to the desired  
number.  
Specify the IP address(es) that  
identifies the SNMP manager(s)  
authorized to send SNMP  
messages to the unit  
NMS n IP Address to the appropriate  
IP address.  
Specify the access allowed for an  
authorized NMS when IP address  
validates is performed  
Access Level to Read or Read/Write.  
3. Save your changes.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 4, Configuration  
Options, for more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options.  
Creating a Login  
A login is required if security is enabled. (Security is enabled by the configuration  
options Login Required for the communication port, and Telnet Login Required or  
FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session.)  
Up to six login ID/password combinations can be created using ASCII text, and  
each login must have a specified access level. Logins must be unique and they  
are case-sensitive.  
" Procedure  
To create a login record:  
1. Select Administer Logins.  
Main Menu Control Administer Logins  
2. Select New, and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
In the field . . .  
Login ID  
Enter the . . .  
ID of 1 to 10 characters.  
Password from 1 to 10 characters.  
Password  
Re-enter password  
Password again to verify that you entered the  
correct password into the device.  
Access Level  
Access level: 1, 2, or 3.  
H Level-1 – User can add, change, and  
display configuration options, save, and  
perform device testing.  
H Level-2 – User can monitor and perform  
diagnostics, display status and  
configuration option information.  
H Level-3 – User can only monitor and  
display status and configuration screens.  
CAUTION: Make sure at least one login is set  
up for Level-1 access or you may be  
inadvertently locked out.  
NOTE:  
See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 8,  
Troubleshooting, should you be locked out inadvertently.  
3. Save your changes.  
When Save is complete, the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field, ready  
for another entry.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for  
more information about security configuration options.  
Modifying a Login  
Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one.  
Deleting a Login  
" Procedure  
To delete a login record:  
1. Select Administer Logins.  
Main Menu Control Administer Logins  
2. Page through login pages/records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys  
until the login to be deleted is displayed.  
3. Select Delete.  
4. Save your deletion.  
When the deletion is complete, the number of login pages/records reflects  
one less record, and the record before the deleted record reappears.  
Example:  
Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
6
This chapter includes the following:  
H
H
Displaying System Information  
Front Panel LEDs  
Front Panel Status LEDs  
Displaying LEDs and Control Leads  
H
Display LEDS and Control Leads Screen (Models 9820, 9820-2M,  
9820-8M)  
Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen (Model 9820-45M)  
Power Module LEDs (Model 9820-45M)  
Device Messages  
H
H
H
H
Status Information  
System and Test Status Messages, which includes:  
Self-Test Results Messages  
Health and Status Messages  
Test Status Messages  
H
H
H
H
H
Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status  
PVC Connection Status  
Network Interface Status  
IP Routing Table (Model 9820-45M)  
Performance Statistics  
Clearing Performance Statistics  
Service Level Verification Performance Statistics  
DLCI Performance Statistics  
Frame Relay Performance Statistics  
Ethernet Performance Statistics (Model 9820-45M)  
Trap Event Log (Model 9820-45M)  
H
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Displaying System Information  
Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver  
unit. This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement  
units and/or making firmware upgrades.  
Main Menu Status Identity  
View this field . . .  
To find the . . .  
System Name  
Domain name for this SNMP-managed node (up to  
255 ASCII characters).  
System Contact  
System Location  
NAM  
Contact person for this SNMP-managed node.  
Physical location for this SNMP-managed node.  
NAM Type  
Type of unit installed, referred to as a network access  
module, or NAM (i.e., DP FR NAM). This card type is  
supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object.  
Serial Number  
Unit’s 7-character serial number.  
Ethernet MAC Address  
(9820-45M)  
Media Access Control (MAC) address assigned to the  
Ethernet port during manufacturing.  
Current Software Revision  
Software version currently being used by the unit.  
Format nn.nn.nn consists of a 6-digit number that  
represents the major and minor revision levels.  
Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit,  
but has not yet been implemented. Format is the same as  
for the Current Software Revision.  
H In Progressindicates that the flash memory is  
currently being downloaded.  
H Invalidindicates that no download has occurred or  
the download was not successful  
Hardware Revision  
Unit’s hardware version. Format nnnn-nnx consists of a  
4-digit number, followed by two digits and one alphabetic  
character.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Front Panel LEDs  
The FrameSaver SLV 9820 unit’s faceplate includes LEDs (light-emitting diodes)  
that provide status on the FrameSaver unit, its network data port, and its user  
data port.  
9820-2M  
OK  
ALM  
TST  
OK  
OK  
FrameSaver® SLV  
TM  
NETWORK  
PORT  
00-16201a-01  
Figure 6-1. Model 9820-2M Front Panel  
9820-45M  
SYSTEM  
NETWORK  
PORT 1  
TD  
OK  
LMI  
TD  
ALM  
TST  
FAN  
PWR  
RD  
RD  
DTR  
DSR  
DSR  
DTR  
F
r
ameSa  
v
e
TM  
r
SYSTEM  
SL  
V
OK  
9820-45M  
ALM  
TST  
NETW  
LMI  
ORK  
FA  
N
P
TD  
WR  
POR  
RD  
T
1
DTR  
DSR  
TD  
RD  
DTR  
DSR  
00-16750  
Figure 6-2. Model 9820-45M Front Panel  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Front Panel Status LEDs  
Table 6-1. System Status LEDs  
Label  
Indication  
Color  
What It Means  
OK  
Power and  
Operational  
Status  
Green  
ON – FrameSaver unit has power and it is  
operational.  
OFF – FrameSaver unit is in a power-on  
self-test, or there is a failure.  
ALM  
Operational  
Alarm (Fail)  
Red  
ON – FrameSaver unit has just been reset,  
or an error or fault has been  
detected.  
Error/fault/alarm conditions:  
H Clock Out of Range  
H CTS Down  
H DLCI Down  
H DTR Down  
H LMI Down  
H Loss of Signal (LOS)  
H Self-Test Failed  
H SLV Timeout  
H Two Level-1 Users Accessing  
Device  
OFF – No failures have been detected.  
These alarms appear on the System and  
Test Status screen. See Health and Status  
Messages for additional information.  
TST  
Test Mode  
Yellow  
ON – Loopback or test pattern is in  
progress, initiated locally, remotely,  
or from the network.  
OFF – No tests are active.  
FAN  
(9820-45M)  
Fan Failure  
Yellow  
Yellow  
ON – At least one fan has failed and the  
unit is in danger of overheating.  
OFF – Fans are operational.  
PWR  
(9820-45M)  
Power Failure  
ON – One of the power supplies has failed  
and redundant power is no longer  
available.  
OFF – Both power supplies are operational,  
or only one power supply is installed.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-2. NETWORK Status LEDs  
Label  
Indication  
Color  
What It Means  
OK  
Operational  
Status  
Green  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
ON – The interchange circuits for the port  
are in the correct state to transmit  
and receive data.  
OFF – The port is idle. Occurs if the port is  
configured to monitor DSR, CTS, or  
RLSD and the leads are not asserted,  
or TM is asserted on the DCE, or a  
valid clock signal cannot be detected  
on the port.  
LMI  
LMI OK  
Green  
(Model 9820-45M) The Local Management  
Interface is running on the frame relay link on  
the network interface.  
(Model 9820-45M) Data is being sent or  
received on the circuit.  
TD  
Transmit Data  
Receive Data  
Green  
Green  
Green  
RD  
(Model 9820-45M) Current state of the control  
lead.  
DTR  
Data Terminal  
Ready  
DSR  
Data Set Ready Green  
Table 6-3. PORT Status LEDs  
Label  
Indication  
Color  
What It Means  
OK  
Operational  
Status  
Green  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
ON – The interchange circuits for the port  
are in the correct state to transmit and  
receive data.  
OFF – The port is idle. Occurs if the port is  
configured to monitor DTR and/or RTS  
and the lead(s) is not asserted.  
(Model 9820-45M) Current state of the control  
lead.  
TD  
Transmit Data  
Receive Data  
Green  
Green  
Green  
RD  
DTR  
Data Terminal  
Ready  
DSR  
Data Set Ready Green  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Displaying LEDs and Control Leads  
The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen allows you to monitor a remote unit  
and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems. The appropriate  
interfaces are shown on this screen, with the appropriate status highlighted.  
Main Menu Status Display LEDs and Control Leads  
Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions. LED and control lead  
descriptions are in the sections that follow.  
Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
Display LEDs & Control Leads Screen (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
main/status/leds  
9820-2M  
Device Name: Node A  
5/13/2000 05:01  
DISPLAY LEDS & CONTROL LEADS  
DP FR NAM  
GENERAL  
OK  
NETWORK1  
OK  
Port-1  
OK  
Alarm  
Test  
TXD  
RXD  
TXD  
RXD  
RLSD(Ind)  
DSR  
DTR  
RTS(Control)  
CTS  
TM  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Refresh  
Table 6-4. General LEDs  
Label  
Indication  
What It Means  
OK  
Operational Status  
The unit has power and is operational.  
Alarm  
Test  
Operational Alarm (Fail)  
Test Mode  
The unit has just been reset, or an error or fault  
has been detected.  
A test is in progress.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-5. Network and User Data Port LEDs and Control Leads  
Label  
Indication  
What It Means  
Both Network and User Data Ports  
OK  
Operational Status  
Transmit Data  
The data port is operational.  
TXD  
Data is being sent to the far-end device on the  
data port.  
RXD  
Receive Data  
Data is being received from the far-end device  
on the data port.  
Additional Network Data Port Control Leads  
RLSD  
Receiver Line Signal  
Detector  
If Port Type is set to V.35 or EIA530:  
Shows the current state of the RLSD control  
lead.  
If Port Type is set to X.21:  
Shows the current state of the Indication  
interface control lead.  
DSR  
CTS  
TM  
Data Set Ready  
Clear to Send  
Test Mode  
Shows the current state of the DSR control  
lead.  
This lead is not used when Port Type is set to  
X.21.  
Shows the current state of the CTS control  
lead.  
This lead is not used when Port Type is set to  
X.21.  
A test is currently running in the NTU.  
This lead is not used when Port Type is set to  
X.21.  
Additional User Data Port Control Leads  
DTR  
Data Terminal Ready  
Shows the current state of the DTR control  
lead.  
This lead is not used when Port Type is set to  
X.21.  
RTS  
Request to Send  
If Port Type is set to V.35 or EIA530:  
Shows the current state of the RTS control  
lead.  
If Port Type is set to X.21:  
Shows the current state of the Control interface  
control lead.  
See Configuring the Physical Interfaces in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for  
additional information.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen (Model 9820-45M)  
Display LEDs & Control Leads Screen (Model 9820-45M)  
main/status/leds  
9820-45M  
Device Name: Node A  
5/13/2000 05:02  
DISPLAY LEDS & CONTROL LEADS  
DP FR NAM  
GENERAL  
OK  
NETWORK1  
TD  
Port-1  
TD  
Alarm  
RD  
RD  
Test  
DTR  
DSR  
TM  
LMI OK  
DTR  
DSR  
Backup  
Fan Fail  
Pwr Fail  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Refresh  
Table 6-6. General LEDs  
Label  
Indication  
What It Means  
OK  
Operational Status  
The unit has power and is operational.  
Alarm  
Operational Alarm (Fail)  
The unit has just been reset, or an error or fault  
has been detected.  
Test  
Test Mode  
Backup  
A test is in progress.  
Backup  
When flashing, the unit is originating or  
answering a backup session. When on, a  
backup link has been established.  
Fan Fail  
Pwr Fail  
Fan Failure  
At least one fan has failed.  
Power Supply Failure  
One of the power modules has failed.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-7. Network and User Data Port Control Leads  
Label Indication What It Means  
Both Network and User Data Ports  
TD  
Transmit Data  
Data is being transmitted on the circuit.  
Data is being received on the circuit.  
RD  
Receive Data  
DTR  
Data Terminal Ready  
Shows the current state of the DTR control  
lead.  
DSR  
Data Set Ready  
Shows the current state of the DSR control  
lead.  
Additional Network Data Port Control Leads  
TM  
Test Mode  
Shows the current state of the TM interface  
control lead.  
LMI OK  
LMI OK  
Local Management Interface is running  
successfully on the frame relay link on the  
network interface.  
See Configuring the Physical Interfaces in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for  
additional information.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Power Module LEDs (Model 9820-45M)  
Each power module has a green LED which remains lit while power is applied  
and the power module is functioning.  
When the yellow front panel System PWR LED is lit, one of the power modules  
has failed. The failed power module can be identified from the back of the DSU  
by its unlit LED.  
Table 6-8. Power Module Troubleshooting  
What to Do  
Configuration Symptom  
(in order, if problem persists)  
One Power  
Module  
No front panel LEDs are 1. Verify that the receptacle in use  
lit.  
provides 120 Vac.  
2. Verify that the power module switch is  
in the On position.  
3. Replace the power module. See  
Replacing a Power Module in  
Chapter 12, Hardware Maintenance.  
4. Call your service representative.  
Two Power  
Modules  
No front panel LEDs are 1. Verify that the receptacles in use  
lit.  
provide 120 Vac.  
2. Verify that the power module switches  
are in the On position.  
3. Replace the power modules. See  
Replacing a Power Module in  
Chapter 12, Hardware Maintenance.  
4. Call your service representative.  
The front panel System  
PWR LED is lit.  
1. Check the power module LEDs from the  
back of the unit and replace the failed  
power module (the one whose LED is  
off). See Replacing a Power Module in  
Chapter 12, Hardware Maintenance.  
2. Call your service representative.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Device Messages  
These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens.  
All device messages are listed in alphabetical order.  
Table 6-9. Device Messages (1 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Access level is n,  
Configuration is  
Read-only.  
The user’s access level is 2 No action needed.  
or 3; the user is not  
authorized to change  
configurations.  
Already Active  
The test selected is already H Allow test to continue.  
running.  
H Select another test.  
H Stop the test.  
Cannot Modify TS  
Management Link  
The Management PVC you H No action needed.  
are attempting to modify is  
H Modify a different PVC.  
defined as the TS  
Management Link.  
Cannot save - no  
Level 1 Login IDs  
You are attempting to save Create a Login ID with an access  
a configuration which has  
level of 1, then save the  
configuration.  
no Level 1 Login ID.  
Command Complete  
Connection Refused  
Configuration has been  
saved or all tests have  
been aborted.  
No action needed.  
Wait and try again.  
Two menu-driven user  
interface sessions are  
already in use when a  
Telnet session was  
attempted.  
DLCI in connection.  
Delete connection first that was part of a  
You tried to delete a DLCI  
H No action needed, or  
H Delete the connection, then  
connection.  
delete the DLCI.  
DLCI Number Already The number entered is a  
Enter another DLCI number.  
Enter another DLCI number.  
Exists  
duplicate of an existing  
DLCI record.  
DLCI Number  
Reserved  
The number entered is a  
special excluded DLCI in  
the product.  
File Transfer Complete A file transfer was  
Switch to the newly downloaded  
software.  
performed successfully.  
(Seen at an FTP  
terminal.)  
See Changing Software in  
Chapter 7, FTP Operation.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-9. Device Messages (2 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
File Transfer Failed –  
Invalid file  
A file transfer was  
attempted, but it was not  
successful.  
H Try again, making sure you  
type the filename correctly.  
(Seen at an FTP  
terminal.)  
H Exit the FTP session, or  
download another file.  
See Changing Software in  
Chapter 7, FTP Operation.  
Invalid Character (x)  
An invalid character was  
entered.  
Reenter information using valid  
printable ASCII characters.  
Invalid date: must be  
mm/dd/yyyy  
A non-valid date was  
entered on the System  
Information screen.  
Reenter the date in the  
month/day/4-digit year format.  
Invalid time: must be  
hh:mm:ss  
A non-valid system time  
was entered on the System hour:minutes:seconds format.  
Information screen.  
Reenter the time in the  
Invalid – Was Already A test was already in  
No action needed.  
Active  
progress when it was  
selected.  
Invalid Password  
Login is required and an  
incorrect password was  
entered; access is denied.  
H Try again.  
H Contact your system  
administrator to verify your  
password.  
Invalid Test  
Combination  
A conflicting loopback or  
pattern test was in progress  
when Start was selected to  
start another test, or was  
active on the same or  
H Wait until other test ends and  
message clears.  
H Cancel all tests from the Test  
screen (Path: main/test).  
another interface when  
Start was selected.  
H Stop the test from the same  
screen the test was started  
from.  
IP addresses must be The address entered  
Enter a different IP address.  
unique  
matches that of another  
NMS already defined.  
Limit of six Login IDs  
reached  
An attempt to enter a new  
login ID was made, and the  
limit of six login/password  
combinations has been  
reached.  
H Delete another login/password  
combination.  
H Reenter the new login ID.  
Limit of Mgmt PVCs  
reached  
New was selected from the H Do not create the  
PVC Connection Table and  
the maximum number of  
management PVCs has  
already been created.  
management PVC.  
H Delete another management  
PVC, and try again.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring  
Table 6-9. Device Messages (3 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Limit of PVC  
Connections reached  
New was selected from the H Do not create the PVC  
PVC Connection Table and  
the maximum number of  
PVCs has already been  
created.  
connection.  
H Delete another PVC  
connection, and try again.  
Link Inactive  
You attempted to start a  
PVC test on an inactive  
link.  
Activate the link or test a different  
link.  
Name Must be Unique Name entered for a  
management PVC has  
Enter another 4-character name  
for the logical/management link.  
been used previously.  
No circuits available  
for Mgmt PVC  
New was selected from the Configure more network and/or  
Management PVCs option  
screen, but all configured  
DLCIs have been  
Port-1 DLCIs and try again.  
connected.  
No DLCIs available for  
connection  
New was selected from the H No action needed.  
PVC Connection Table, but  
H Configure more DLCIs and try  
all configured DLCIs have  
been connected.  
again.  
New was selected from the Configure more network and/or  
Management PVCs option  
screen, but all Link/DLCI  
pairs have been connected.  
Port-1 Links/DLCIs pairs and try  
again.  
No DLCIs Defined  
DLCI Records was selected Select New and create a DLCI  
from an interface’s  
record.  
Configuration Edit/Display  
menu, and no DLCI  
Records have been created  
for this interface.  
No more DLCIs  
allowed  
New or CopyFrom was  
selected from an interface’s new DLCI record.  
DLCI Records configuration  
Delete a DLCI, then create the  
screen, and the maximum  
number of DLCI Records  
had already been reached.  
No more PVCs  
allowed  
CreatePVC was selected  
on the DLCI Records  
configuration screen, and  
the maximum numbers of  
PVCs for the device has  
already been created.  
Delete a PVC, then create the  
new PVC.  
No Security Records  
to Delete  
Delete was selected from  
the Administer Login  
screen, and no security  
records had been defined.  
H No action needed.  
H Enter a security record.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring  
Table 6-9. Device Messages (4 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Not enough circuits  
available  
A new TS Access DLCI  
was selected, but the  
maximum number of  
network DLCIs or  
Delete a DLCI, then create the  
new DLCI.  
management PVCs has  
already been created.  
Note: This PVC has  
been designated as  
the TS Management  
Link  
The Management PVC you No action needed. The PVC  
displayed is defined as the  
cannot be modified.  
TS Management Link.  
No VCIs available on  
VPI  
All virtual circuits for the  
VPI have been assigned in  
other DLCI records or  
Management PVCs.  
Select a different VPI.  
Password Matching  
Error – Re-enter  
Password  
Password entered in the  
Re-enter Password field of  
the Administer Logins  
screen does not match  
what was entered in the  
Password field.  
H Try again.  
H Contact your system  
administrator to verify your  
password.  
Permission Denied  
A file transfer was  
attempted, but the:  
(Seen at an FTP  
terminal.)  
H User did not have  
H See your system administrator  
to get your security level  
changed.  
Level 1 security.  
H Wrong file was specified H Try again, entering the correct  
when the put command  
file with the put command.  
was entered.  
H User attempted to  
upload a program file  
from the unit.  
H Enter the put command  
instead of a get command;  
you can only transfer files to  
the unit, not from it.  
See Upgrading System  
Software in Chapter 7, FTP  
Operation.  
Please Wait  
Command takes longer  
than 5 seconds.  
Wait until message clears.  
Resetting Device,  
Please Wait ...  
Yes (or y) was entered in  
the Reset COM Port usage  
field of the System Paused  
menu.  
No action needed.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring  
Table 6-9. Device Messages (5 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Test Active  
No higher priority health  
and status messages exist,  
and a test is running.  
H Contact service provider if test  
initiated by the network.  
H Wait until the test ends and  
message clears.  
H Cancel all tests from the Test  
screen (Path: main/test).  
H Stop the test from the same  
screen the test was started  
from.  
User Interface  
Already in Use  
Two Telnet sessions are  
already in use when an  
attempt to access the  
menu-driven user interface  
through the COM (Terminal)  
port is made.  
H Wait and try again.  
H Contact one of the IP address  
user and request that they log  
off.  
IP addresses and logins of  
the users currently  
accessing the interface are  
also provided.  
User Interface Idle  
Previously active session is Log on to the FrameSaver unit.  
now closed/ended, and  
access via the COM  
(Terminal) port is now  
available.  
Session has been ended  
due to timeout.  
No action needed.  
Enter a valid value.  
Value Out of Range  
(n–m)  
The value entered is not  
within the valid limits of n  
through m, inclusive.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring  
Status Information  
Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit. The following  
illustration shows the Status menu for the FrameSaver unit.  
Status Menu  
main/status  
9820-45M  
Device Name: Node A  
5/13/2000 5:03  
STATUS  
System and Test Status  
LMI Reported DLCIs  
PVC Connection Status  
Network Interface Status  
IP Routing Table (Model 9820-45M only)  
Performance Statistics  
Trap Event Log  
(Model 9820-45M only)  
Display LEDs and Control Leads  
Identity  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
NOTE:  
Status messages contained in the following sections are in  
alphabetical order.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
System and Test Status Messages  
System and test status information is selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu Status System and Test Status  
The following information is included on this screen:  
H
H
H
Self-Test Results Messages  
Health and Status Messages  
Test Status Messages  
Self-Test Results Messages  
These self-test result messages appear in the Self-Test Results field at the top of  
the System and Test Status screen.  
Table 6-10. Self-Test Results Messages  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Failure xxxxxxxx  
An internal failure occurred 1. Record the failure code.  
(xxxxxxxx represents an  
8-digit hexadecimal failure  
2. Reset the unit.  
code used by service  
personnel).  
3. Contact your service  
representative.  
Record the failure code  
before resetting the unit;  
otherwise, the error  
information will be lost.  
Last Reset  
(Model 9820-45M)  
Date and time the unit was No action needed.  
powered on or reset.  
Passed  
No problems were found  
during power-on or reset.  
No action needed.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Health and Status Messages  
The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the  
FrameSaver unit.  
Table 6-11. Health and Status Messages (1 of 2)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
Auto-Configuration Active  
Auto-Configuration feature is active, which allows  
automatic configuration and cross-connection of  
DLCIs as they are reported by the network LMI.  
Back-to-Back Mode Active  
The operating mode has been configured for  
back-to-back operation (Main Menu Control →  
Change Operating Mode).  
The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another  
FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch  
between them.  
This feature is useful for product demonstrations  
or for a point-to-point configuration using a leased  
line.  
Backup Active  
(Model 9820-45M) A backup has been established  
and data is flowing over an alternate DLCI.  
Clock Out of Range at Network 1  
A valid network data port rate cannot be detected  
because the:  
H Unit is trying to detect a valid port rate.  
H Rate detected is greater than the highest port  
rate supported by the unit.  
– FrameSaver SLV 9820 rates:  
56/64 or 128 kbps in 56 or 64 kbps  
increments  
– FrameSaver SLV 9820-2M rates:  
64 – 2048 kbps in 64 kbps increments  
– FrameSaver SLV 9820-8M rates:  
1024 – 8192 kbps in 8 kbps increments  
– FrameSaver SLV 9820-45M rates:  
1024 – 44210 kbps in 8 kbps increments  
CTS down to Port-1 Device  
DLCI nnnn Down,  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M) The user data  
port CTS control lead on the FrameSaver unit is  
off.  
The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down.  
1,2  
frame relay link  
DTR Down from Port-1 Device  
The DTR control lead from the device connected to  
the user data port is deasserted.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-11. Health and Status Messages (2 of 2)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
Ethernet Link Down  
(Model 9820-45M) The Ethernet port is  
administratively enabled, but communication is not  
possible.  
Fan Failure  
(Model 9820-45M) At least one fan has failed.  
Link Down Administratively,  
frame relay link  
The specified frame relay link has been disabled  
by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI  
Protocol on another link is in a failed state.  
2
This is not an alarm condition so System  
Operationalappears, as well.  
LMI Discovery in Progress,  
frame relay link  
Local Management Interface protocol discovery is  
in progress to determine which protocol will be  
used on the specified frame relay link.  
2
2
LMI Down, frame relay link  
LOS at Network 1  
The Local Management Interface(s) has been  
declared down for the specified frame relay link.  
A Loss of Signal (LOS) condition is detected on the  
network data port. Either the control leads on the  
network data port are deasserted, the TM lead is  
asserted, or no clock is detected from the NTU.  
Network Com Link Down  
The communication link for the COM (Terminal)  
port is down, and the port is configured for Net  
Link.  
Power Supply Failure  
(Model 9820-45M) Power supply voltage has  
dropped below an acceptable level.  
SLV Timeout, DLCI nnnn,  
frame relay link  
An excessive number of SLV communication  
responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit  
have been missed on the specified multiplexed  
DLCI; the DLCI is not suitable for user data.  
1, 2, 3  
When a hardware bypass capable device has  
been detected at the other end of the PVC and this  
condition occurs, only user data for EDLCI 0 will be  
transmitted while this condition exists.  
Two Level-1 Users Accessing  
Device  
Two Level 1 users are already using the menu-  
driven user interface; only two sessions can be  
active at one time.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
3
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Test Status Messages  
These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status  
screen. You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test.  
See Chapter 8, Troubleshooting, for more information on tests, including how to  
start and stop them.  
Table 6-12. Test Status Messages  
Message  
What It Indicates  
DTE External LB Active, Port-1  
An external DTE Loopback is running on the user  
data port.  
DTE Init. Ext LB Active, Port-1  
Lamp Test Active  
The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback  
on the user data port.  
The Lamp Test is active, causing the LEDs on the  
faceplate to flash on and off.  
Monitor Pttn Active, DLCI nnnn,  
frame_relay_link  
The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the  
specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link.  
1,2  
No Test Active  
No tests are currently running.  
PVC Loopback Active, DLCI nnnn, A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI  
1,2  
frame_relay_link  
on the frame relay link.  
Send Pttn Active, DLCI nnnn,  
frame_relay_link  
The unit is monitoring the selected test pattern on  
the specified DLCI for the interface.  
1,2  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status  
Network LMI-reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu Status LMI Reported DLCIs  
The LMI Reported DLCIs screen displays the status and CIR (if supported by the  
switch) for each DLCI, whether the DLCI is configured or not.  
LMI-Reported DLCIs Status Screen Example  
main/status/lmi_dlcis  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-2M  
05/13/2000 5:04  
frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs  
Page 1 of 2  
DLCI  
300  
305  
400  
410  
411  
420  
430  
501  
511  
520  
STATUS  
Active  
CIR (bps)  
16000  
DLCI  
622  
624  
625  
713  
822  
STATUS  
Active  
Active  
Deleted  
Active  
Active  
Active  
CIR (bps)  
32000  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Inactive  
Deleted  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Active  
Inactive  
Active  
Active  
32000  
32000  
32000  
32000  
32000  
* 1002  
256000  
64000  
* – DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
NextLink PrevLink  
Refresh  
PgUp PgDn  
An asterisk (*) next to the DLCI indicates that the DLCI has been configured for  
the link.  
DLCIs without an asterisk have not been configured in the unit. These DLCIs  
pass through the unit transparently, without being monitored and with no  
demultiplexing/multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being  
performed. Only DLCIs on the Net1-FR1 and Port-1 frame relay links appear on  
this screen; nonconfigured DLCIs on other links are discarded.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-13. Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status  
Field  
Status  
What It Indicates  
DLCI  
16 through 1007  
Identifies the Local Management  
Interface-reported DLCI numbers  
assigned to the selected interface – the  
identifying number assigned to the path  
between two frame relay FrameSaver  
units’ ports.  
DLCI statuses are listed in ascending  
order (i.e., lowest number first).  
Status  
LMI-reported status of the DLCI:  
Active  
H Whether the DLCI is active (capable  
of carrying data) in the frame relay  
network,  
Inactive  
H Whether it is inactive in the frame  
relay network,  
1
Deleted  
H Whether it has been deleted by the  
frame relay network, or  
1
New  
H Whether it has been created by the  
frame relay network.  
CIR (bps)  
FrameSaver SLV 9820:  
0–128000  
Displays the committed information rate  
reported by the Stratacom switch. CIR  
information only appears in this column  
when LMI Protocol is set to Standard.  
FrameSaver SLV  
9820-2M: 02048000  
If blank, the switch does not support this  
feature.  
FrameSaver SLV  
9820-8M: 08192000  
FrameSaver SLV  
9820-45M: 044210000  
1
Appears for 10 seconds only, before the network changes Deletedto Inactive  
and New to Active.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
PVC Connection Status  
PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu Status PVC Connection Status  
Only PVC connections with Source DLCIs configured to be Active are shown.  
PVC Connection Status Screen Example  
main/status/connections  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-45M  
05/13/2000 5:05  
Page 1 of 2  
PVC CONNECTION STATUS  
Primary Destination  
Source  
Alternate Destination  
Link DLCI EDLCI Link  
DLCI EDLCI  
Status  
LINK  
DLCI EDLCI Status  
Port-1 201  
Port-1 202  
Port-1 100  
Port-1 204  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
300  
1001  
1001  
1001  
1
4
2
5
3
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Mgmt PVC Dunedin Net1-FR1 1001  
Port-1 206  
Port-1 207  
Port-1 208  
Port-1 209  
Port-1 210  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
1001  
1001  
500  
502  
504  
west  
west  
west  
400  
302  
304  
Inactive  
Active  
Active  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Refresh  
PgUp PgDn  
If the No PVC Connectionsmessage appears instead of a list of PVC  
connections, no PVC connections have been configured yet.  
The Alternate Destination columns appear only for the Model 9820-45M.  
Table 6-14. PVC Connection Status (1 of 2)  
Field  
Status  
What It Indicates  
Link  
Identifies the cross-connection of  
DLCIs configured for the unit.  
Net1-FR1  
H Source/destination is frame relay  
link 1 on Network 1 – the network  
data port.  
Port-1  
H User data port – Port-1.  
MgmtPVCName  
H Virtual circuit is a management  
link that terminates in the unit,  
where Name is the link name.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-14. PVC Connection Status (2 of 2)  
Field  
Status  
What It Indicates  
DLCI  
16 to 1007  
For standard DLCIs.  
Identifies an individual link/  
connection embedded within a  
DLCI.  
EDLCI  
Status  
0 to 62  
For multiplexed DLCIs only.  
Identifies an individual link/  
connection embedded within a  
DLCI.  
Identifies whether the physical  
interfaces, LMIs, and DLCIs are all  
enabled and active for this PVC  
connection.  
1
Active  
H The PVC is currently active.  
Inactive  
H The PVC is inactive because:  
– Alarm conditions and network  
and SLV communication  
status indicate that data  
cannot be successfully  
passed.  
– The unit has disabled the  
interface or frame relay link  
due to internal operating  
conventions.  
– Activation of an alternate  
virtual circuit is not warranted;  
that is, no alarm condition on  
the primary destination link  
has been detected.  
Disabled  
H The PVC cannot be activated  
and is essentially disabled as a  
result of how the unit was  
configured. Possible causes:  
– The physical interface at one  
or both ends of the PVC is/are  
disabled.  
– The frame relay link on one or  
both ends of the PVC is/are  
disabled.  
Invalid  
H Some portion of the PVC  
connection is not fully configured.  
1
For the circuit to be active, both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Network Interface Status  
Network Interface Status can be selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu Status Network Interface Status  
Network Interface Status Screen Example  
main/status/network  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-45M  
05/13/2000 5:06  
NETWORK 1 INTERFACE STATUS  
Operating Rate (Kbps):  
44120  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Refresh  
Table 6-15. Network Interface Status  
Field Value  
What It Indicates  
Operating Rate (Kbps) 0–52000  
Disconnected  
The clock rate detected on the  
network interface.  
The line is disconnected.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
IP Routing Table (Model 9820-45M)  
The IP Routing Table display is selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu Status IP Routing Table  
IP Routing Table Screen Example  
main/status/connections  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-45M  
05/13/2000 5:07  
Page 1 of 2  
IP ROUTING TABLE  
Destination  
Mask  
Gateway  
Hop Type Interface  
TTL  
135.001.001.000 255.255.255.000 135.026.001.254 1 Tmp  
135.001.002.111 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1 NMS  
135.001.220.000 255.255.255.000 135.042.001.254 1 Loc  
135.001.221.000 255.255.255.000 135.042.001.254 2 Loc  
135.001.220.010 255.255.255.000 135.042.001.254 1 Loc  
135.001.222.000 255.255.255.000 135.026.001.254 1 RIP  
135.001.001.010 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1 RIP  
135.001.001.011 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1 NMS  
135.001.001.012 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1 NMS  
135.001.001.013 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1 NMS  
PVCMgmt1001 130  
PVCMgmt1002 130  
Ethernet  
Modem  
COM  
999  
999  
999  
30  
Modem  
PVCMgmt1003  
PVCMgmt1004  
PVCMgmt1005  
PVCMgmt1006  
30  
2
48  
21  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Refresh  
PgUp PgDn  
Table 6-16. IP Routing Table (1 of 2)  
Field  
What It Indicates  
Destination  
Mask  
The IP address of the route.  
The subnet mask of the route.  
Gateway  
Hop  
The network gateway IP address for the route.  
The number of hops to the destination for the route.  
Type  
The method that was used to add the route:  
RIP – The route was discovered through RIP.  
Loc – The route was added as part of the unit’s configuration.  
NMS – The route was added by an NMS using SNMP.  
Tmp – The route was added as a temporary route to answer an  
IP packet that was received. The route is deleted when its TTL  
expires or when the unit is reset.  
(Hyphen) – The source of the route is not maintained in the  
table.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-16. IP Routing Table (2 of 2)  
Field  
What It Indicates  
Interface  
The interface used to get to the destination:  
COM – The COM (Terminal) port is used.  
Modem – The Modem port is used.  
Ethernet – The Ethernet port is used.  
PVCname – The specified management PVC is used.  
Internal – An internal route is used (for loopbacks or internal  
functions).  
TTL  
Time To Live, in seconds. TTL can have a value 1–999.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring  
Performance Statistics  
Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a  
selected interface. Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the  
severity and frequency or duration of a condition.  
Main Menu Status Performance Statistics  
Physical and link layer statistics (Layers 1 and 2) are collected on the port. The  
following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected.  
Performance Statistics Menu  
main/status/performance  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-45M  
5/13/2000 5:08  
PERFORMANCE STATISTICS  
Service Level Verification  
DLCI  
Frame Relay  
Ethernet  
Clear All Statistics  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Clearing Performance Statistics  
Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a directly  
connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is Level-1. This  
feature is useful when troubleshooting problems.  
Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature. True statistic counts  
are always maintained so SLAs can be verified, and they can be viewed from an  
SNMP NMS. However, since statistics can be cleared locally, the statistics viewed  
via the menu-driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the  
NMS.  
" Procedure  
To clear all statistics:  
Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics  
" Procedure  
To clear specific sets of statistics:  
H
Use the ClrSLV&DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI  
performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of  
the following screens:  
Performance Statistics Service Level Verification  
Performance Statistics DLCI  
H
H
Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance  
statistics.  
Performance Statistics Frame Relay  
Use the ClrStats function key to reset the Ethernet performance statistics.  
Performance Statistics Ethernet  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Service Level Verification Performance Statistics  
These statistics appear when Service Level Verification (SLV) is selected from  
the Performance Statistics menu.  
Main Menu Status Performance Statistics Service Level Verification  
They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCIs are multiplexed.  
Table 6-17. Service Level Verification Performance Statistics (1 of 2)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
Far End Circuit  
Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI/VCI (Virtual Path  
Identifier/Virtual Channel Identifier) at the other end of the  
connection.  
If the far-end circuit is a DLCI, the DLCI number (161007)  
appears. If a VPI/VCI, the number is displayed as xx,yyy,  
xx being the VPI number (0 15) and yyy being the VCI  
number (322047).  
Noneappears if the unit has not communicated with the other  
end.  
Far End IP Addr  
IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed  
DLCI connection.  
Noneappears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated  
with the other end, or if the device at the other end of the  
multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured.  
Dropped SLV  
Responses  
The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a  
response from the far-end device has not been received.  
Inbound Dropped  
Frames  
Total number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were dropped in transit.  
The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is  
32  
reached (2 –2), then the count starts over.  
The SLV Delivery Ratio option (see Table 4-3, Service Level  
Verification Options) must be enabled for these statistics to  
appear.  
H Above CIR  
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were above the committed information rate and were  
dropped in transit.  
H Within CIR  
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were within the committed information rate, but were  
dropped in transit.  
H Between CIR&EIR  
H Above EIR  
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were between the committed information rate and excess  
information rate, and were dropped in transit.  
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were above the excess information rate and were dropped  
in transit.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-17. Service Level Verification Performance Statistics (2 of 2)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
Inbound Dropped  
Characters  
Total number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were dropped in transit.  
The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is  
32  
reached (2 –2), then the count starts over.  
The SLV Delivery Ratio option (see Table 4-3, Service Level  
Verification Options) must be enabled for these statistics to  
appear. NAappears instead of a statistical count if FDR/DDR  
(Frame Delivery Ratio/Data Delivery Ratio) information is not  
being received from the far-end device .  
H Above CIR  
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were above the committed information rate and were  
dropped in transit.  
H Within CIR  
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were within within the committed information rate, but were  
dropped in transit.  
H Between CIR&EIR  
H Above EIR  
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were between the committed information rate and excess  
information rate, and were dropped in transit.  
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were above the excess information rate and were dropped  
in transit.  
Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between  
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the  
multiplexed DLCI connection.  
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device is  
not successful.  
Avg RdTrip Latency  
Average round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between  
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the  
multiplexed DLCI connection.  
Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling  
interval and the average is computed (using packets with the  
configured SLV Packet Size (bytes), Table 4-3, Service Level  
Verification Options) over the previous 15-minute period. If  
SLV Packet Size is changed, a new average is not available  
until a new sample has been received.  
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device  
over the last 15 minutes has not been successful.  
Max RdTrip Latency  
Same as average (Avg RdTrip Latency), but storing the  
maximum value of latency over the previous 15-minute  
interval.  
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device  
over the last 15 minutes has not been successful.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring  
The statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the  
connection. If the far-end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit, frame relay, latency,  
Frame Relay Delivery Ratio (FDR), and Data Delivery Ratio (DDR) performance  
statistics are collected. If the far-end device is a non-FrameSaver device, or a  
FrameSaver 9120 or 9620, only frame relay statistics are collected.  
DLCI Performance Statistics  
These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics  
menu.  
Main Menu Status Performance Statistics DLCI  
Table 6-18. DLCI Performance Statistics (1 of 2)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
1
DLCI Up Since  
Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a  
period of inactivity. Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive.  
If the DLCI was Down, this is the time that the DLCI recovered.  
If the DLCI was never Down, this is the first time the unit  
discovered that the DLCI was active in the network.  
1
DLCI Up Time  
Days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the DLCI was last  
declared Active after a period of inactivity. Down is displayed if  
the DLCI is inactive.  
If the DLCI was Down, this is the amount of time since the  
DLCI recovered.  
If the DLCI was never Down, this is the amount of time since  
the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network.  
Total Tx Frames/  
Tx Octets  
Total number of data frames and octets (8-bit bytes)  
transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link.  
H Within CIR  
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI  
of the frame relay link that were within the committed  
information rate.  
H Between CIR&EIR  
H Above EIR  
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI  
of the frame relay link that were between the committed  
information rate and excess information rate.  
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI  
of the frame relay link that were above the excess  
information rate.  
H With DE Set  
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI  
of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set.  
1
Only appears for the network interface.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-18. DLCI Performance Statistics (2 of 2)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
H With BECN Set  
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI  
of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion  
notifications.  
BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in  
the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN  
indicator.  
Total Rx Frames/  
Rx Octets  
Total number of data frames and octets (8-bit bytes) received  
for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link.  
H Within CIR  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed  
information rate.  
H Between CIR&EIR  
H Above EIR  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the  
committed information rate and excess information rate.  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess  
information rate.  
H With DE Set  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set.  
H With BECN Set  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit  
congestion notifications.  
BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in  
the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN  
indicator.  
H With FECN Set  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion  
notifications.  
The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic  
congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the  
FECN indicator.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring  
Frame Relay Performance Statistics  
The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the  
Performance Statistics menu.  
Main Menu Status Performance Statistics Frame Relay  
32  
All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached (2 –2),  
then the count starts over. The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear  
when multiple frame relay links have been configured.  
Table 6-19. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (1 of 3)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
Frame Relay Link  
Frames Sent  
The number of frames sent over the interface.  
Frames Received  
Characters Sent  
Characters Received  
FECNs Received  
The number of frames received over the interface.  
The number of data octets (bytes) sent over the interface.  
The number of data octets (bytes) received over the interface.  
The number of forward explicit congestion notifications  
received over the interface.  
The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic  
congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the  
FECN indicator.  
BECNs Received  
The number of backward explicit congestion notifications  
received over the interface.  
The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic  
congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the  
BECN indicator.  
Frame Relay Errors  
Total Errors  
The number of total frame relay errors, excluding LMI errors.  
Short frames, long frames, invalid DLCIs, unknown DLCIs, and  
unknown errors are included in this total.  
Indicates that there may be a non-frame relay device on the  
other end of the link, or the units at either the far end or both  
ends of the link may be configured incorrectly.  
Invalid Rx Frames  
The number of invalid frames received over the Network or  
Port-1 interface.  
There is a non-frame relay device on the other end of the link.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-19. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (2 of 3)  
Statistic What It Indicates  
Frame Relay Errors (cont’d)  
Short Rx Frames  
The number of frames received over the Network or Port-1  
interface that were less than 5-octets (five 8-bit bytes) in  
length.  
There may be a non-frame relay device on the other end of  
the link.  
Long Rx Frames  
Invalid DLCI  
The number of frames received over the Network or Port-1  
interface that were more than 8192-octets in length.  
The device on the far end of the link may be configured  
incorrectly.  
The number of frames received over the interface that were  
addressed to DLCIs outside the valid range; that is, a number  
less than 16 or greater than 1007.  
The device on the far end of the circuit may have been  
configured incorrectly, or the DLCIs configured for the  
FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCIs supplied by the  
service provider.  
Unknown DLCI  
Unknown Error  
The number of frames received over the interface that were  
addressed to unknown DLCIs.  
The DLCI may not have been configured, or it has been  
configured to be Inactive.  
Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or  
either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly.  
The number of frames received over the interface that do not  
fall into one of the other statistic categories.  
Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize.  
Frame Relay LMI  
LMI Protocol  
The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link.  
Normal condition.  
Status Msg Received  
Total LMI Errors  
The number of LMI status messages received over the  
interface.  
Normal condition.  
The number of LMI errors. Reliability errors, protocol errors,  
unknown report types, unknown information elements, and  
sequence errors are included in this total.  
Network problems.  
Number of Inactives  
The number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link  
Inactive.  
Network problems.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Table 6-19. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (3 of 3)  
Statistic What It Indicates  
Frame Relay HDLC Errors  
Rx Total Errors  
The number of receiver errors on the interface. The following  
are included in this count:  
H Receive invalid frames (short frames, long frames, invalid  
DLCIs, unknown DLCIs, and unknown errors)  
H Rx Total Discards  
H Receive errors (non-octet aligned frames, frames with CRC  
errors, and Rx Overruns)  
Rx Total Discards  
The number of receiver discards on the interface. The  
following are included in this count:  
H Resource errors  
H Rx Overruns  
H Frames received when the link was down  
H Inactive and disconnected DLCIs  
H Inactive destination DLCIs  
H Unknown EDLCIs  
Rx Overruns  
The number of receiver overruns (too many bits) on the  
interface.  
Rx Non-Octet Frames The number of non-octet frames received on the interface.  
Rx CRC Errors  
Tx Total Errors  
The number of received CRC (cycle redundancy check) errors.  
The total number of transmit errors on the interface, including  
transmits discards and transmit overruns.  
Tx Total Discards  
Tx Underruns  
The total number of transmit discards on the interface,  
including underrun flushes.  
The number of transmitter underruns (too few bits) on the  
interface.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Ethernet Performance Statistics (Model 9820-45M)  
The following statistics appear when Ethernet is selected from the Performance  
Statistics menu.  
Main Menu Status Performance Statistics Ethernet  
32  
All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached (2 –2),  
then the count starts over.  
Table 6-20. Frame Relay Performance Statistics  
Field or Statistic  
What It Indicates  
Port Rate (Mbps)  
The operating rate detected on the Ethernet interface. One of:  
10 – The Ethernet port rate is 10 Mbps.  
100 – The Ethernet port rate is 100 Mbps.  
Disabled – The Ethernet interface was disabled after this  
screen was first displayed.  
Duplex  
The duplexing mode of the Ethernet port. One of:  
Full – The Ethernet port is operating in full duplex (4-wire)  
mode.  
Half – The Ethernet port is operating in half duplex (2-wire)  
mode.  
Disabled – The Ethernet interface was disabled after this  
screen was first displayed.  
Frames Transmitted  
Frames Received  
Errored Frames  
The number of frames transmitted over the interface.  
The number of frames received over the interface.  
The number of frames with internal transmit and receive  
errors, transmitter and receiver overruns, receive checksum  
errors, alignment errors, and long frame errors.  
Excessive Collisions  
Carrier Sense Errors  
The number of frames for which transmission failed due to  
excessive collisions.  
The number of times the lack of carrier caused an error in  
transmission.  
Deferred  
Transmissions  
The number of frames whose transmission was delayed  
because the medium was busy.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
6-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring  
Trap Event Log (Model 9820-45M)  
The Trap Event Log display is selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu Status Trap Event Log  
Trap Event Log Screen Example  
main/status/connections  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-45M  
05/13/2000 5:09  
TRAP EVENT LOG  
Total Trap Events:  
3
Time Elapsed  
Since Event  
Event  
0d 09:01:32 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link “Port-1” up.  
1d 22:21:19 Unit Reset.  
1d 22:25:01 Primary Clock Failed.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Refresh  
PgUp PgDn  
Table 6-21. Trap Event Log  
Field  
What It Indicates  
Total Trap Events  
The number of entries in the log.  
Time Elapsed Since  
Event  
The number of days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the  
specified event occurred.  
Event  
The trap text string, up to 255 characters.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
6-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FTP Operation  
7
This chapter includes the following:  
H
FTP File Transfer  
Upgrading System Software  
Determining Whether a Download is Completed  
Changing Software  
Transferring Collected Data  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FTP Operation  
FTP File Transfer  
The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server  
over Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). A complete binary image of the  
configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup. To use this  
feature, the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions.  
Using this feature, you can transfer configuration files to/from a FrameSaver  
node, program files to a FrameSaver node, and User History data from a  
FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a  
management PVC, or through the COM (Terminal) port.  
Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer:  
H
You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get  
commands. However, you can retrieve the data file for the user history  
reports regardless of access level.  
H
You cannot put a configuration file to the factory.cfg or current.cfg files  
under the system directory. Configuration files should be put to a customer  
file (cust1.cfg or cust2.cfg), then loaded into the downloaded unit’s Current  
Configuration via the menu-driven user interface.  
H
H
H
You can only put a NAM program file (nam.ocd) into a FrameSaver unit. You  
cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host.  
Before putting a download file, you must use the bin binary command to  
place the data connection in binary transfer mode.  
When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS, you can only get  
a uhbcfull.dat file. It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get  
this information (see Transferring Collected Data).  
H
H
A data file (uhbcfull.dat or lmitrace.syc) cannot be put into a FrameSaver  
node.  
LMI packet capture data (lmitrace.syc) is not readable when the LMI Packet  
Capture Utility is active.  
FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to  
be downloaded in the background, using the selected bandwidth and without  
interfering with normal operation. Downloads can be performed quickly, using the  
full line speed, or at a slower rate over an extended period of time.  
You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would  
initiate an FTP to any other IP-addressable device.  
NOTE:  
Loading a configuration with many DLCIs from a unit’s Customer  
Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take  
time. Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit’s  
currently active configuration.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FTP Operation  
" Procedure  
To initiate an FTP session:  
1. Start the FTP client program on your host. For example, on a UNIX host,  
type ftp, followed by the FrameSaver unit’s IP address.  
2. If a login and password are required (see Creating a Login in Chapter 5,  
Security and Logins), you are prompted to enter them. If not, press Enter.  
The FTP prompt appears.  
The starting directory is the root directory (/). Use standard FTP commands  
during the FTP session, as well as the following remote FTP commands.  
Command  
Definition  
cd directory  
Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the  
specified directory.  
dir [directory]  
get file1 [file2]  
Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory.  
If no directory is specified, the current one is used.  
Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node  
to the local directory on the host (for configuration files only).  
remotehelp  
[command]  
Print the meaning of the command. If no argument is given, a  
list of all known commands is printed.  
ls [directory]  
Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory’s contents.  
If no directory is specified, the current one is used.  
put file1 [file2]  
Copy file1 from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the  
current directory of the FrameSaver node. If file2 is not  
specified, the file will be named file1 on the FrameSaver node.  
recv file1 [file 2]  
send file1 [file 2]  
pwd  
Same as a get.  
Same as a put.  
Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit  
node.  
bin  
Places the FTP session in binary-transfer mode.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FTP Operation  
Upgrading System Software  
If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit’s program code, you must transfer  
the upgrade of the nam.ocd file in the system memory directory using the put  
command.  
NOTE:  
Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC,  
or through the COM (Terminal) port if Port Use is set to Net Link (see  
Table 4-17, Communication Port Options).  
" Procedure  
To download software:  
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading.  
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.  
3. Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the  
upgrade, provided this function is supported by your equipment.  
4. Type cd system to change to the system directory.  
5. Perform a put of Rxxxxxx.ocd (xxxxxx being the software release number) to  
the nam.ocd file to start the upgrade.  
If the message displayed is . . .  
Then . . .  
nam.ocd: File Transfer Complete  
The download was successful. The file is  
loaded into system memory.  
nam.ocd: File Transfer Failed –  
Invalid file  
The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit.  
A different Rxxxxxx.ocd file will need to be  
downloaded. Repeat the step or end the  
FTP session.  
NOTE:  
During the download, a series of hash marks (#) appear. When the hash  
marks stop appearing, there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the  
nam.ocd: File Transfer Completemessage appears. Please be  
patient. Do not exit from FTP at this time.  
See Changing Software to activate the newly downloaded software.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FTP Operation  
Determining Whether a Download Is Completed  
To see whether a download has completed, check the Identity screen.  
Main Menu Status Identity  
Check Alternate Software Rev. under the NAM Identity column.  
H
H
H
If a software revision number appears, the file transfer is complete.  
If In Progressappears, the file is still being transferred.  
If Invalidappears, no download has occurred or the download was not  
successful.  
Changing Software  
Once a software upgrade is downloaded, it needs to be activated. When  
activated, the unit resets, then executes the downloaded software. With this  
feature, you control when the upgrade software is implemented.  
" Procedure  
To switch to the new software:  
1. Go to the Control menu, and select Select Software Release.  
Main Menu Control Select Software Release  
The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just  
transferred are shown.  
If the download failed, Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field  
instead of the new release number. Repeat the procedure in Upgrading  
System Software if this occurs.  
2. Select Switch&Reset.  
3. Enter Yes to the Are you sure? prompt. The unit resets and begins  
installing the newly transferred software.  
4. Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current  
Software Revision.  
Main Menu Status Identity  
NOTE:  
If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit’s Identity  
screen while the unit is downloading software, the In Progress...  
message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field.  
See Displaying System Information in Chapter 6, Monitoring, to see what is  
included on the unit’s Identity screen.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FTP Operation  
Transferring Collected Data  
SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an  
NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP, which is faster than other  
methods. For Models 9820, 9820-2M, and 9820-8M, the rate at which the data  
file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP Max Receive Rate (Kbps) option (see  
Table 4-13, Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 4, Configuration  
Options). For Model 9820-45M, the rate is fixed.  
NOTE:  
Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet  
data; the data files are not in user-readable format. LMI packet capture data  
can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log (see Viewing Captured Packets  
from the Menu-Driven User Interface in Chapter 8, Troubleshooting, for  
additional information).  
" Procedure  
To retrieve data:  
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data  
will be retrieved.  
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.  
3. Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the  
upgrade, provided this function is supported by your equipment.  
4. Type cd data to change to the data directory.  
If retrieving . . .  
Then . . .  
SLV statistics  
Perform a get of the uhbcfull.dat file.  
H File Transfer Complete– Transfer was  
successful.  
H File Transfer Failed– Transfer was not  
successful. Try again or end the session.  
LMI packet capture data  
H Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility.  
Main Menu Control LMI Packet Capture Utility  
LMI packet capture data is not available (readable)  
when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active.  
H Perform a get of the lmitrace.syc file.  
One of the following responses appears:  
File Transfer Complete  
File Transfer Failed  
Permission Denied– The LMI Packet  
Capture data was not readable, or was a null file.  
Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try  
again.  
5. Close the FTP session.  
SLV statistics and/or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
8
This chapter includes the following:  
H
H
Problem Indicators  
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication  
Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu  
Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power  
Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit  
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature  
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature  
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface  
Alarms  
H
H
H
H
Troubleshooting Tables  
Device Problems  
Frame Relay PVC Problems  
Tests Available  
H
H
H
Test Timeout Feature  
Starting and Stopping a Test  
Aborting All Tests  
PVC Tests  
Network or Port (Internal) PVC Loopback  
Send Pattern  
Monitor Pattern  
Connectivity  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
H
Physical Tests  
DTE Loopback  
IP Ping Test  
H
H
Lamp Test  
Problem Indicators  
The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems:  
Indicators . . .  
See . . .  
LEDs  
Displaying LEDs and Control Leads and Front Panel  
LEDs in Chapter 6, Monitoring, as well as the user  
interface screen.  
Main Menu Status →  
Display LEDs and Control LEDs  
Health and Status  
Health and Status Messages in Chapter 6, Monitoring.  
Main Menu Status System and Test Status  
Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu-driven  
user interface screen.  
Performance statistics  
Performance Statistics in Chapter 6, Monitoring, to help  
you determine how long a problem has existed.  
Alarm conditions that will  
generate an SNMP trap  
Alarms on page 8-7.  
SNMP traps  
Appendix B, SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm  
Defaults.  
Traps supported include warm-start, authentication-failure,  
enterprise-specific (those specific to the unit), link-up, and  
link-down.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication  
You can reset the unit in one of four ways:  
H
H
H
Reset it from the Control menu.  
Cycle the power.  
Reset the configuration options for the COM (Terminal) port, or reload the  
factory default settings.  
H
Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS (see your NMS documentation).  
The unit performs a self-test when it is reset.  
Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu  
Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power-on self-test of the unit.  
" Procedure  
To reset the unit from the Control menu:  
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Control.  
2. Select Reset Device and press Enter. The Are You Sure?prompt  
appears.  
3. Type y (Yes) and press Enter. The unit reinitializes itself, performing a  
self-test.  
Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power  
Cycling the power resets the unit. This is an emergency procedure that should be  
executed only if the Control menu is inaccessible, and never be executed while  
the unit is in use.  
H
H
Models 9820, 9820-2M and 9820-8M: Disconnect then reconnect the power  
cord.  
Model 9820-45M: Switch off both power supplies then switch on both power  
supplies.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit  
Configuring the unit improperly can render the menu-driven user interface  
inaccessible. If this occurs, connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly  
connected asynchronous terminal.  
" Procedure  
To reset COM (Terminal) port settings:  
1. Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19.2 kbps, using character  
length of 8 bits, with one stop-bit, and no parity. In addition, set Flow Control  
to None.  
2. Reset the unit, then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen  
appears. (See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication for other  
methods of resetting the unit.)  
3. Tab to the desired prompt, and type y (Yes) at one of the prompts.  
If selecting . . .  
The following occurs . . .  
Reset COM (Terminal) port  
usage  
H Port Use is set to Terminal so the  
asynchronous terminal can be used.  
H Data Rate (Kbps), Character Length, Stop Bits,  
and Parity are reset to the factory defaults.  
H Unit resets itself.  
Reload Factory Defaults  
H All configuration and control settings are reset  
to the Default Factory Configuration,  
overwriting the current configuration.  
H Unit resets itself.  
CAUTION: This causes the current configuration  
to be destroyed and a self-test to be performed.  
If no selection is made within 30 seconds, or if No (n) is entered, the unit  
resets itself and no configuration changes are made.  
Once the unit resets itself, connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen  
appears.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature  
A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service  
providers isolate device problems within their networks. This feature allows Telnet  
or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is  
essentially transparent to customer operations. No alarms or SNMP traps are  
generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer.  
See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for  
additional information about this feature.  
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature  
A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI  
errors are detected. Using this utility, any enabled frame relay link on the user  
data port or network interface can be selected. The utility captures any LMI  
packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called lmitrace.syc in the  
system’s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network  
Associates Sniffer for analysis.  
The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information. See  
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface for additional  
information on this feature.  
" Procedure  
To use this utility:  
1. Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility.  
Main Menu Control LMI Packet Capture Utility  
2. Select an enabled frame relay link, or Capture Interface, either Net1-FR1  
or Port-1.  
3. Start packet capture.  
While capturing data, the status is Active. Packets in Buffer indicates the  
number of packets that have been captured. Up to 8000 packets can be held.  
When the buffer is full, the oldest packets will be overwritten.  
4. To stop the utility, press Enter. The field toggles back to Start.  
5. Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the  
information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for  
debugging/decoding.  
See Transferring Collected Data in Chapter 7, FTP Operations, for additional  
information about this feature.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface  
The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log. Once the capture  
buffer or trace log is full, the oldest packets are overwritten. To view the most  
recently captured packets using the menu-driven user interface:  
LMI Packet Capture Utility Display LMI Trace Log  
LMI Trace Log Example  
main/control/lmi_capture/display_log  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-2M  
5/13/2000 6:01  
LMI TRACE LOG  
Page 1 of 3  
Packets Transmitted to Net1-FR!  
LMI Record #1 at 0 s  
Packets Received from Net1-FR1  
Status Enquiry Message, 13 bytes  
LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023  
Sequence Number Exchange  
Send Seq #181, Rcv Seq #177  
LMI Record #2 at 0 s  
Status Enquiry Message, 13 bytes  
LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023  
Sequence Number Exchange  
Send Seq #181, Rcv Seq #177  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Refresh PgUp PgDn  
Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI  
messages.  
The following information is provided:  
H
The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet (18000), and the  
amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured.  
The maximum amount of time displayed is 4,294,967 seconds (s), which is  
reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded.  
H
H
H
H
H
The type of message, either Status or Status Enquiry, from the captured  
packet, and the number of bytes in the packet.  
The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured  
packet, and the DLCI number for the packet.  
The type of information contained in the captured packet, either Sequence  
Number Exchange or Full Status Report.  
The send and receive (rcv) sequence numbers from the captured packet  
(0255).  
On the Packets Received side of the screen, PVC status for up to ten DLCIs  
can be shown. It shows the DLCI number, its active bit status, and if Standard  
LMI is running, the DLCI’s CIR value.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Alarms  
The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP  
trap for a physical interface, and the frame relay LMIs and DLCIs. These alarm  
conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and  
Test Status screen.  
Main Menu Status System and Test Status  
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (1 of 4)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Clock Out of Range at A valid port rate cannot be  
If the message continues to  
appear:  
Network  
detected because the:  
H Unit is auto-rating on the H Check that the DCE is  
network data port, trying  
to detect a valid port  
rate.  
connected to the network data  
port, and that the cable is  
securely attached at both  
ends.  
H Rate detected is greater  
than the highest port rate H Confirm that there is a valid  
supported by the unit.  
clock on the cable.  
– FrameSaver SLV  
9820 rates:  
64 or 128 kbps  
H Manually configure the NTU  
for a rate supported by the  
FrameSaver unit.  
– FrameSaver SLV  
9820-2M rates: 64 –  
2048 kbps in 64 kbps  
increments  
H If necessary, replace the  
FrameSaver unit with a higher  
speed FrameSaver unit  
capable of supporting the NTU  
clock rate.  
– FrameSaver SLV  
9820-8M rates:  
1024 – 8192 kbps in  
8 kbps increments  
– FrameSaver SLV  
9820-45M rates:  
1024 – 144210 kbps  
in 8 kbps increments  
CTS down to  
Port-1 Device  
The CTS control lead on  
the device’s interface is off. Port-1.  
Check DTR and RTS from  
(Models 9820,  
9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
H Verify that the port is enabled.  
H Check DTR from the user data  
port.  
DLCI nnnn Down,  
frame relay link  
The DLCI for the specified  
frame relay link is down.  
Verify that the network LMI is up.  
If it is, contact your network  
service provider.  
1,2  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
frame relay link is one of the following:  
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network data port, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (2 of 4)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
DTR Down from  
Port-1 Device  
The DTR control lead on  
the device connected to  
Port-n is off.  
Examine the attached DTE and  
cable connected to the  
FrameSaver unit’s port.  
H Check that the Port-1 cable is  
securely attached at both  
ends.  
H Check the status of the  
attached equipment.  
Fan Failure  
(9820-45M)  
One of the fans has failed.  
Notify your service  
representative. Have the fan  
assembly replaced as soon as  
possible. See Replacing the  
Front Panel Assembly in  
Chapter 12, Hardware  
Maintenance (9820-45M).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (3 of 4)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
LMI Down,  
frame relay link  
The Local Management  
Interface is down for the  
specified frame relay link.  
For the network data port:  
2
H If LMI was never up, verify  
that the LMI Protocol setting  
reflects the LMI type being  
used.  
H If LMI was never up:  
– Verify that the proper time  
slots have been configured.  
– Verify that the LMI Protocol  
setting reflects the LMI type  
being used.  
H Verify that Frame Relay  
Performance Statistics show  
LMI frames being transmitted.  
If all of the above have been  
verified and the physical link is  
not in Alarm, contact your  
network provider.  
For user data port:  
H Check that the DTE cable is  
securely attached at both  
ends.  
H Verify that Transmit Clock  
Source and Invert Transmit  
Clock options are properly  
configured.  
H Verify that Frame Relay  
Performance Statistics show  
LMI frames being received. If  
no frames are being received:  
– Check the attached device.  
– Verify that the LMI Protocol  
setting reflects the LMI type  
being used.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network data port, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (4 of 4)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
LOS at Network 1  
A Loss of Signal (LOS)  
condition is detected. Either  
the control leads on the  
network data port are  
deasserted, the TM lead is  
asserted, or no clock is  
detected from the NTU.  
H Check that the network cable  
is securely attached at both  
ends.  
H Contact your network provider.  
H Network cable problem.  
H No signal is being  
transmitted at the far-end  
FrameSaver unit.  
H NTU or network facility  
problem.  
Power Supply Failure  
(9820-45M)  
The power supply output  
voltage has dropped below representative. See Replacing a  
the specified tolerance  
level.  
Notify your service  
Power Module in Chapter 12,  
Hardware Maintenance  
(9820-45M).  
Self-Test Failure  
The unit did not pass its  
basic verification tests  
when it was powered on or  
reset.  
H Reset the unit.  
H Contact your service  
representative.  
SLV Timeout,  
DLCI nnnn,  
frame relay link  
An excessive number of  
SLV communication  
responses from the remote service provider.  
system have been missed  
on the specified multiplexed  
DLCI and link.  
Verify that the network LMI is up.  
If it is, contact your network  
1,2  
When a hardware bypass-  
capable device has been  
detected at the other end of  
the PVC and this condition  
occurs, only user data for  
EDLCI 0 will be transmitted  
as long as the condition  
exists.  
Two Level-1 Users  
Accessing Device  
Two users with Level 1  
security access are in  
session with the device.  
Alert the other user before  
starting tests or altering  
configuration options.  
Yellow at Network 1  
(9820-45M)  
A yellow alarm signal is  
received on the network.  
H Cable problem.  
H Check that the associated  
cables are securely attached.  
H T3 facility problem.  
H Contact your network provider.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
frame relay link is one of the following:  
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network data port, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Tables  
The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble-free service. However, if a  
problem occurs, refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for  
possible solutions.  
Device Problems  
Table 8-2. Device Problems (1 of 2)  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Solutions  
No power, or the LEDs The power cord is not  
Check that the power cord is  
securely attached at both ends.  
are not lit.  
securely plugged into the  
wall receptacle to rear  
panel connection.  
The wall receptacle has no  
power.  
H Check the wall receptacle  
power by plugging in some  
equipment that is known to be  
working.  
H Check the circuit breaker.  
H Verify that your site is not on  
an energy management  
program.  
Power-On Self-Test  
fails. The Alarm LED  
is on after power-on.  
The unit has detected an  
internal hardware failure.  
H Reset the unit and try again.  
H Contact your service  
representative.  
H Return the unit to the factory  
(refer to Warranty, Sales,  
Service, and Training  
Information on page A of this  
document).  
Cannot access the  
FrameSaver unit or  
the menu-driven user  
interface.  
Login or password is  
incorrect, COM (Terminal)  
port is misconfigured, or the  
FrameSaver unit is  
otherwise configured so it  
prevents access.  
H Reset the FrameSaver unit  
(Main Menu Control →  
Reset Device).  
H Contact your service  
representative.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 8-2. Device Problems (2 of 2)  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Solutions  
Failure xxxxxxxx  
The unit detects an internal H Record the 8-digit code from  
appears at the top of  
the System and Test  
Status screen, at  
Self-Test Results.  
software failure.  
the System and Test Status  
screen.  
H Reset the unit and try again.  
H Contact your service  
representative and provide the  
8-digit failure code.  
An LED appears  
dysfunctional.  
LED is burned out.  
Run the Lamp Test. If the LED in  
question does not flash with the  
other LEDs, then contact your  
service representative.  
Not receiving data.  
Network cable loose or  
broken.  
H Reconnect or repair the cable.  
H Call the network service  
provider.  
Receiving data errors  
on a multiplexed DLCI, being used for automatic  
but frame relay is  
okay.  
Frame Relay Discovery is  
Change the DLCI Type for each  
network DLCI from Multiplexed to  
Standard, turning off  
DLCI and PVC  
configuration.  
multiplexing.  
The equipment at the other  
end is not frame relay  
RFC 1490-compliant.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Frame Relay PVC Problems  
Table 8-3. Frame Relay PVC Problems  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Solutions  
No receipt or  
transmission of data.  
Cross Connection of the  
DLCIs are configured  
incorrectly.  
Verify the PVC connections  
and DLCIs by checking the  
network-discovered DLCIs on  
the LMI Reported DLCIs screen.  
DLCI is inactive on the  
frame relay network.  
H Verify that the DLCI(s) is  
active on the PVC Connection  
Status screen. If the DLCI(s)  
is not active, contact the  
service provider.  
H Verify the LMI Reported DLCI  
field on the Interface Status  
screen.  
DTE is configured  
incorrectly.  
Check the DTE’s configuration.  
LMI is not configured  
properly for the DTE or  
network.  
Configure LMI characteristics to  
match those of the DTE or  
network.  
LMI link is inactive.  
Verify that the LMI link is active  
on the network; the Status Msg  
Received counter on the Network  
Frame Relay Performance  
Statistics screen increments.  
Losing Data.  
CIR and Excess Burst Size Verify the configured Network  
are inadequate for the  
throughput required.  
PVC settings, then increase the  
settings, as needed, or decrease  
throughput on the PVC.  
Frame relay network is  
experiencing problems.  
Run PVC Loopback and Pattern  
tests to isolate the problem, then  
contact the service provider.  
Out of Sync  
message.  
If Monitor Pattern was  
selected, it means the test  
pattern generator and  
receiver have not yet  
synchronized.  
H Verify that the unit at the  
other end is configured to  
Send Pattern.  
Correct unit configurations.  
H Correct the CIR setting so  
both units are configured the  
same.  
CIR settings for the units at  
each end are mismatched.  
If the message persists, it  
means that 5 packets out of  
25 are missing or are out of  
sequence.  
H Check the line’s error rate –  
the physical line quality.  
Contact the service provider.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Tests Available  
The following tests are available to a FrameSaver SLV 9820 model.  
Test Menu Example  
main/test  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-2M  
5/13/2000 6:02  
TEST  
Network PVC Tests  
Data Port PVC Tests  
Data Port Physical Tests  
IP Ping  
Lamp Test  
Abort All Tests  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when no PVCs have been configured  
on the interface. Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and  
secured.  
Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane 5.x management solution using its  
Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface, as well as from the menu-driven  
user interface.  
Test Timeout Feature  
A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test (as opposed  
to manually terminating a test) after it has been running a specified period of  
time.  
It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is  
remotely managed through an inband data stream (PVC). If a test is accidently  
commanded to execute on the interface providing management access, control is  
regained when the specified time period expires, automatically terminating the  
test.  
To use this feature, enable the Test Timeout configuration option, and set a  
duration for the test to run in the Test Duration (min) configuration option (see  
Configuring General System Options in Chapter 4, Configuration Options).  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Starting and Stopping a Test  
Use this procedure to start, monitor, or abort specific tests. To abort all active  
tests on all interfaces, see Aborting All Tests.  
When the status of a test is . . .  
The only command available is . . .  
Inactive  
Active  
Start  
Stop  
Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure.  
" Procedure  
To start and stop a test:  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu Test  
2. Select an interface to be tested (Network or Data Port PVC Tests, or Data  
Port Physical Tests) and press Enter.  
The selected test screen appears. Start appears in the Command column.  
Inactive appears in the Status column.  
3. Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected.  
The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available  
test. Start is highlighted.  
4. Highlight the Start command for the test you want to start and press Enter.  
Stop now appears and is highlighted, and the status of the test changes to  
Active.  
5. Press Enter to stop the test.  
Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive.  
6. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Aborting All Tests  
Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on  
all interfaces, with exception to DTE-initiated loopbacks. To abort individual tests  
that are active, see Starting and Stopping a Test.  
" Procedure  
To abort all tests on all interfaces:  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu Test  
2. Select Abort All Tests and press Enter.  
Command Completeappears when all tests on all interfaces have been  
stopped.  
NOTE:  
Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE-initiated loopbacks.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
PVC Tests  
PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface.  
H
When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices,  
they are nondisruptive to data, so user data can continue to be sent during  
a test.  
H
If the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device, PVC tests  
are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data. Also, the Connectivity test  
would not appear.  
Loopback, and send/monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the  
selected DLCI. FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit. If a  
PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit, the other end can send and  
monitor pattern tests.  
The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with the  
multiplexed DLCI 550 selected. If a standard DLCI was selected, (Disruptive),  
rather than (Non-Disruptive), would be displayed after Test. Also, the  
Connectivity test would not appear.  
PVC Tests Screen Example  
main/test/network_pvc  
Device Name: Node A  
9820-2M  
5/13/2000 6:03  
NETWORK PVC TESTS  
DLCI Number: 550  
Test (Non-Disruptive)  
Command  
Status  
Result  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
PVC Loopback:  
Send Pattern:  
Monitor Pattern:  
Start  
Start  
Start  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Sequence Errors 99999+  
Data Errors 99999+  
RndTrip Time (ms) 99999  
Connectivity:  
Start  
Inactive  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
NOTE:  
Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs  
in the two FrameSaver devices. If errors are detected, verify the CIR  
configuration and retest.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Network or Port (Internal) PVC Loopback  
The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per-PVC  
basis. This test logically (not physically) loops back frames received from another  
FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device.  
Main Menu Test Network PVC Tests PVC Loopback  
Network PVC Loopback  
DTE  
PVC #x  
Network  
PVC #x  
98-16186  
Main Menu Test Data Port PVC Tests PVC Loopback  
Port PVC Loopback  
DTE  
PVC #x  
Network  
PVC #x  
98-16187  
Send Pattern  
This test sends frames filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence  
number over the selected interface on a per-DLCI basis.  
To send a pattern test on a link:  
Main Menu Test [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests] →  
Send Pattern  
If the selected  
DLCI is configured as . . .  
And the default  
Rate (kbps) setting is . . .  
Then . . .  
Standard  
(Disruptive)appears  
after Test  
100% of CIR  
10% of CIR  
Multiplexed  
(Non-Disruptive)  
appears after Test  
If the CIR is zero, the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Monitor Pattern  
This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence  
number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device.  
To monitor a pattern test on a link:  
Main Menu Test [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests] →  
Monitor Pattern  
The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result  
column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync. An Out of Syncmessage  
appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence.  
These error counts are updated every second. If the maximum count is reached,  
99999+appears in these fields.  
Connectivity  
The Connectivity test is only available for multiplexed DLCIs.  
Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver  
device node at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active. This test stops  
automatically and can only be executed for multiplexed PVCs.  
Main Menu Test [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests] →  
Connectivity  
Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver device at the other end  
of the PVC. A RndTrip Time(ms)message appears in the Result column  
when a response is received within 5 seconds, indicating that the FrameSaver  
device at the remote end is alive (operational and connected), and the round trip  
(RT) time is shown in milliseconds (ms), with a resolution of 1 ms. If a response is  
not received within 5 seconds, No Responseappears in the Result column.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Physical Tests  
Physical Tests can be commanded for the user data port.  
CAUTION:  
You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached;  
you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test  
equipment.  
DTE Loopback  
The DTE external Loopback (DTLB) test loops the received signal on a user data  
port back to the DTE. Use this test for isolating problems on the user data port.  
An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back.  
User  
Network  
Data DTLB  
Port  
Port  
99-16284  
CAUTION:  
DTE Loopback will affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs  
assigned to the user data port. Any IP data being sent while this test  
is active will be disrupted.  
To start and stop a DTE Loopback, follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu Test Data Port Physical Tests  
View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
IP Ping Test  
An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and  
any FrameSaver device, router, or NMS to which it has a route.  
Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are:  
H
To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver  
device in the network to verify that the path is operational. Select Procedure 1  
to ping any far-end FrameSaver device.  
H
To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver  
device and the central site NMS. During a remote site installation, an IP Ping  
test is typically run from the remote site to ping the NMS at the central site.  
The remote FrameSaver device must have SNMP trap managers configured,  
and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS. Select  
Procedure 2 to ping the NMS at the central site.  
H
To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central  
site FrameSaver unit. The remote FrameSaver device must have configured  
the SNMP trap managers to be sent the ping. Select Procedure 2 to ping the  
SNMP trap managers.  
" Procedure 1  
To ping any far-end FrameSaver device:  
1. Select the IP Ping test.  
Main Menu Test IP Ping  
2. Enter the IP Address of the device the ping is being sent to, then select Start.  
NOTE:  
If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized, or the far-end device has just  
initialized, it may take about a minute for the devices to learn the routes  
via the proprietary RIP.  
3. Verify the results of the IP Ping test.  
— While the test is running, In Progress... appears in the Status field.  
— When the test is finished, Alive. Latency = nn msshould appear  
as the Status (nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds).  
If any other message is displayed, additional testing will be required.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
" Procedure 2  
To ping the NMS at the central site:  
1. Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit’s IP address in its  
routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit.  
2. Verify that the central site NMS’s router has the FrameSaver unit’s IP address  
in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit.  
3. Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap  
Manager if the router is to route data, so a route has been configured within  
the FrameSaver unit.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
SNMP Traps  
Or, for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router,  
verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured.  
Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication →  
Node IP Default IP Destination  
Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC  
Multiplexing is used, as when using the Auto-Configuration feature.  
4. Select the IP Ping test.  
Main Menu Test IP Ping  
5. Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS, then select Start.  
6. Verify the results of the IP Ping test.  
— While the test is running, In Progress...appears in the Status field.  
— When the test is finished, Alive. Latency = nn msshould appear  
as the Status (nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds).  
If any other message is displayed, additional testing will be required.  
Lamp Test  
The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and  
functioning properly. All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1/2  
second during execution of the test. When the test is stopped, the LEDs are  
restored to their normal condition.  
Main Menu Test Lamp Test  
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set, the  
Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires. See Test Timeout Feature for  
additional information.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up OpenLane for  
FrameSaver Devices  
9
This chapter includes:  
H
H
H
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices  
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System  
Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support  
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices  
Paradyne’s OpenLane Service Level Management (SLM) system supports all  
FrameSaver and FrameSaver SLV devices with the following features:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
Web and database services  
Web access to health and status information  
Web access to real-time, as well as historical graphs and reports  
Web access to SLV reports  
On-demand polling of FrameSaver devices  
Web-based diagnostic tests: end-to-end, PVC loopbacks, connectivity, and  
physical interface tests  
H
H
Basic device configuration  
Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery of SLV devices with their  
SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled  
H
H
H
Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network  
Device reset capability  
HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web  
interface  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices  
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System  
Instructions for installing Paradyne’s OpenLane Service Level Management  
(SLM) System can be found in the following documents:  
H
H
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for UNIX  
Quick Start Installation Instructions  
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for Windows NT  
Quick Start Installation Instructions  
See Product-Related Documents in About This Guide for document numbers.  
Select the appropriate document. In addition to installation instructions, these  
documents include instructions for:  
H
H
H
H
Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services.  
Accessing the OpenLane application.  
Adding a FrameSaver device.  
Adding a Customer ID.  
The OpenLane SLM System has an extensive Help system. For additional  
information refer to the following sources:  
H
H
For UNIX users – Refer to the readme.txt file for distributed infrastructure  
details, and the online Help for operational details.  
For Windows NT users – Refer to the online Help.  
Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support  
With the OpenLane SLM system’s extensive online Help system, the application  
is self-documenting and you have access to the most current system information.  
" Procedure  
To set up FrameSaver SLV support:  
1. Start the OpenLane services, then access the application.  
2. Enter a Customer ID of Admin for access to customer profiles, frame relay  
access facilities components, and PVC components.  
3. Add FrameSaver devices.  
4. Create customer profiles.  
5. Set up historical data collection.  
6. Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data.  
See the Quick Start Installation Instructions to learn how to perform these steps  
and for additional information.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus  
for FrameSaver Devices  
10  
This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as it relates to  
FrameSaver SLV devices. It includes the following:  
H
H
Getting Started  
Configuring NetScout Manager Plus  
Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network  
Verifying Domains and Groups (Models 9820 and 9820-2M)  
Correcting Domains and Groups (Models 9820 and 9820-2M)  
Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template  
Editing Alarms  
Adding SLV Alarms Manually  
Creating History Files  
Installing the User-Defined History Files  
Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data  
H
H
Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus (Models 9820 and  
9820-2M)  
H
Statistical Windows Supported (Models 9820 and 9820-2M)  
Release 5.5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides  
FrameSaver SLV-specific support.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Getting Started  
Before configuring NetScout Manager Plus, you need to copy some OpenLane  
directories to a NetScout Manager Plus user directory. OpenLane provides these  
directories as a starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files. A  
template of alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for  
creating history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available.  
OpenLane paradyne directories include the following:  
H
H
H
Properties:  
paradyne.fsd file found in OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory  
Properties:  
paradyne.fst file found in OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory  
Alarms:  
slvtemplate.fctfile found in  
OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory  
H
User history:  
pd*.udhfiles found in OpenLane/netscout/userHistory/directory  
These files should be moved to $NSHOME/usrso they can be used.  
See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template and Creating History Files for  
additional information.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Configuring NetScout Manager Plus  
For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear, make sure your  
environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file.  
You need to:  
H
H
Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory.  
Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager.  
In addition, for Models 9820 and 9820-2M you need to:  
H
H
H
Configure agent properties.  
Verify and correct domains and groups.  
Monitor the agent and DLCIs.  
Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing  
and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus, refer  
to the:  
H
H
NetScout Manager/Plus User Guide to help you install the application,  
monitor traffic, and diagnose emerging problems on network segments.  
NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you  
configure agents, remote servers, and report templates using the various  
NetScout products.  
H
NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between  
the FrameSaver unit and its router, and configure the probe on network  
segments you want to monitor.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network  
" Procedure  
1. Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window.  
2. Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar (on the  
left side of the window).  
A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the  
Name and IP Address headings. If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus  
installation, the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are  
configured yet.  
3. Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar (to the far  
right of the screen). Applicable configuration and administration icons appear  
in the box below the application bar.  
4. Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main  
window.  
5. Select the Add... button (down the center of the screen).  
6. Minimally, enter the following:  
— Agent name  
— IP address  
— Properties File: Select paradyne.  
7. Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent, discover  
its DLCIs, and return to the Configuration Manager main window.  
The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box, with its  
DLCIs in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen.  
8. Select the Test button (fourth button down, center of the screen) to make sure  
you can communicate with the agent.  
Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout  
Server Administrator Guide for additional information.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Verifying Domains and Groups (Models 9820 and 9820-2M)  
" Procedure  
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and  
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open  
the Configuration Manager main window.  
2. Verify that only FrameSaver SLV-supported domains appear listed in the  
Domain column. FrameSaver SLV-supported domains include:  
— ATALK  
— DECNET  
— IP  
— IPX  
— RMON  
— SNA  
— NETB  
— NET~  
— OSI  
— VINES  
— IPV6  
3. Verify that:  
— S (statistics collection) appears for each domain listed in the Group  
column.  
— H (hosts) appears for the IP domain only.  
— Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group column.  
— Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns.  
— Dashes appear under all Logging columns: Stat, Host, Conv.  
4. If all these requirements are met, no further action is required. Close the  
Configuration Manager window.  
If all these requirements are not met, a FrameSaver SLV-supported domain  
needs to be added, or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted, the  
Properties File must be edited.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Correcting Domains and Groups (Models 9820 and 9820-2M)  
Properties need to be edited when not using the Paradyne-provided file and  
when:  
H
H
H
An unsupported domain needs to be deleted.  
A missing domain needs to be added.  
Groups, Samples, Interval, and Logging are not configured as specified in  
Step 3 of Verifying Domains and Groups.  
" Procedure  
1. Select the the Property... button (down the center of the Configuration  
Manager main window). The Property Editor window opens.  
2. To delete an unsupported domain, click on the domain from the Domains list,  
then select the Delete button.  
The Are you sure?prompt appears. Select Yes. The unsupported domain  
disappears from the list.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
3. To add a FrameSaver SLV-supported domain or correct property settings,  
select the Edit... button (to the right of the Domain section of the Property  
Editor window). The Edit Domain window opens.  
4. Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following:  
Property  
Description  
Setting  
Groups  
Stats (S)  
Hosts (H)  
Statistics collection  
Enabled for all domains.  
Level 3 information  
(network)  
Enabled for IP domain only.  
Disabled for all other  
domains.  
Conversations (C) Protocols being used  
Event logging  
Disabled for all domains.  
Logging  
Disabled for all domains and  
groups.  
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to apply the changes.  
Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in the NetScout Manager/Plus &  
NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template  
Once DLCIs have been discovered, SLV alarms should be configured and  
assigned to each DLCI. OpenLane provides a template for configuring alarms.  
DLCI alarms can be configured manually, but using the Paradyne alarm defaults  
template greatly reduces configuration time.  
The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB:  
— Frames Sent (SLVFramesSnt)  
— Tx CIR Utilization (SLVTxCIRUtil)  
— Rx DLCI Utilization (SLVrxDLCIUtil)  
— Frames Sent Above CIR  
(SLVFramesTxAbvCIR)  
— Tx DLCI Utilization (SLVTxDLCIUtil) — Average Latency (AverageLatency)  
— Frames Received (SLVFramesRec) — Current Latency (CurrentLatency)  
These alarms and current values can be found in $NSHOME/usr/slvtemplate.fct,  
which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms. This file can be copied  
and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values.  
The copied .fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all  
DLCIs on the unit using the eztrap utility. All .fct files must be in $NSHOME/usr.  
To configure alarms manually, see Adding SLV Alarms Manually.  
NOTE:  
Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure  
below. If you have an NT system, please install Perl before proceeding.  
" Procedure  
1. Open a terminal window and go to $NSHOME/usr.  
2. Type eztrap -i filename.fct -o agentname.fct agentname and press Enter to  
run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCIs for the  
copied .fct file.  
The message eztrap doneappears when the .fct file is transferred.  
3. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and  
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open  
the Configuration Manager main window.  
4. Edit any alarm values that need to be changed.  
5. Select the Install button (down the center of the Configuration Manager  
main window) to load alarms for the unit. This may take some time, so  
please be patient.  
See Editing Alarms if any default settings need to be changed.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Editing Alarms  
" Procedure  
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and  
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open  
the Configuration Manager main window.  
2. Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area (in the upper  
right of the window), then Property... (down the center of the screen).  
The Custom Property Editor window opens.  
3. Select a DLCI from the Trap list, and select the Edit... button (to the right of  
the list).  
The Edit Trap window opens.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
4. Edit any trap defaults that may be required. See Step 4 of Adding SLV  
Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change.  
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to apply your changes.  
The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears.  
6. Select the Install button (down the center of the Configuration Manager main  
window) to apply your changes.  
Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server  
Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Adding SLV Alarms Manually  
Once DLCIs have been discovered, SLV alarms should be defined and assigned  
to each DLCI.  
When configuring alarms manually, every alarm must be configured for each  
DLCI; that is, if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCIs, 160 trap configurations  
must be created (8 x 20). For this reason, it is recommended that the OpenLane  
defaults be used. Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually.  
To load OpenLane default settings for alarms, see Adding SLV Alarms Using a  
Template.  
" Procedure  
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and  
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open  
the Configuration Manager main window.  
2. Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area (in the upper  
right of the window), then Property... (down the center of the screen).  
The Custom Property Editor window opens (see the window in Editing  
Alarms).  
3. Select a DLCI from the Trap list, and select the Add... button (to the right of  
the list). The Add Trap window opens.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
4. Click on the ... button to the right of indicated fields for a drop-down list from  
which selections can be made. Minimally, configure the following fields:  
Field  
Select or Enter . . .  
Domain  
DLCI  
User Defined  
DLCI number for trap being assigned  
PARADYNE  
Stats Type  
Trap Variable  
Key1  
Trap variable to be configured  
The ifIndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1  
DLCI number (same as DLCI above)  
Key2  
1
Type  
Absolute or Delta radio button  
2
Rising, Falling, or Both radio button  
Threshold  
Value that will trigger a trap.  
1
Latency MIB variables should be Absolute; all others should be Delta.  
Generally, Rising is selected.  
2
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to add this alarm.  
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCIs.  
Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server  
Administrator Guide for additional information.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Creating History Files  
Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for  
each interface. An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface.  
A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored.  
Additional user history tables are created using the command-line prompt in  
NetScout Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs (Object IDs) to be  
monitored into the unit.  
OpenLane provides several useful examples, including three files containing a  
complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored: one for a  
DLCI, one for a frame relay link, and one containing system-type OIDs. Any of  
these files can be used as a template when creating customized history files  
specific to the FrameSaver unit.  
These files have a pdn*.udh(user-defined history) format and are found in the  
OpenLane/netscout/userHistory directory. The userHistory files should be  
moved to $NSHOME/usrso they can be used.  
A separate *.udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be  
monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded. Use a text editor  
to create these *.udh files by:  
H
H
Copying one of the interface-specific files (DLCI or link) and editing it using  
one of the examples provided as a guide.  
Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the  
FrameSaver unit.  
CAUTION:  
Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the  
unit, UserHistory1 and UserHistory2. These files must not be modified.  
These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports.  
It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCIs before starting to be  
sure your agent and DLCI lists are current. To rediscover agents and their DLCIs,  
select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window (the  
FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected).  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
" Procedure  
1. Open a terminal window and go to $NSHOME/usr.  
2. Copy an example or interface-specific file to a new file that contains the user  
history table number.  
3. Open the new file using a text editor.  
The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs (Object IDs). The frame  
relay interface number 101016002 must replace @IFN, and the DLCI number  
to be monitored must replace @DLCI.  
Example: frCircuitSentFrames  
Change “1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.@IFN.@DLCI”  
to “1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.101016002.301”  
The only valid interface number for a FrameSaver 9820 model is 101016002.  
4. Edit the new file, as needed.  
Refer to Creating .UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager  
Plus User Guide for additional information.  
See Appendix B, SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Default, for OID  
information for an interface.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Installing the User-Defined History Files  
Once the user-defined history files have been created, the files need to be  
installed. History files are installed from the command-line prompt in NetScout  
Manager Plus. Should the FrameSaver unit be reset, these files will need to be  
reinstalled. The command used to install a new user history table is located in  
$NSHOME/bin.  
CAUTION:  
Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2. UserHistory1 and UserHistory2  
are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports.  
Editing either of these files will destroy SLV reporting capability.  
" Procedure  
1. Type dvuhist -f agentname user_history_table_number config  
number_of_buckets interval download_file.udh to load user-defined history  
files for the frame relay link.  
Example:  
dvuhist -f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallas51k.udh  
The interval must be entered in seconds.  
2. Type dvuhist -f agentname DLCI_numberuser_history_table_number  
config number_of_buckets interval download_file.udh to load user-defined  
history files for a specific DLCI.  
Example:  
dvuhist -f “Dallas51 301” 3 config 30 60 Dallas301.udh  
The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI.  
For these examples, user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3  
on the History List.  
See Step 5 in Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data to verify that the user-defined  
history files have been loaded.  
Refer to Installing .UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager  
Plus User Guide for additional information.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data  
Once the monitoring variables have been defined, a problem DLCI can  
monitored.  
" Procedure  
To monitor user history data:  
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay radio  
button still selected, select the Traffic radio button.  
The appropriate icons appear.  
2. Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCIs appear in the DLCI  
list box (under the agent list box).  
3. Highlight the DLCI to be monitored.  
4. Click on the Custom History icon. The NetScout Custom History window  
opens.  
Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
5. Select History List from the View menu. The History List window opens.  
The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list.  
6. Highlight the desired set of user history variables, and select the OK button.  
Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables. This may  
take some time, so please be patient.  
7. Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu, if desired (3D Bar is shown).  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected, you can click  
on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data.  
8. Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view (see  
Step 7 of this procedure).  
Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in  
Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional  
information.  
See Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order) in Appendix B, SNMP MIBs  
and Traps, and RMON Alarm Default, to identify OID information being shown.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus  
(Models 9820 and 9820-2M)  
Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus,  
select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent,  
or one of its DLCIs.  
NOTE:  
Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar  
are supported for FrameSaver SLV agents.  
The procedure below describes how to monitor an agent’s traffic. The procedure  
is the same for protocol monitoring, but you may be prompted to select a Domain  
Group as well as an agent or DLCI.  
" Procedure  
1. Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent, or one of its  
DLCIs.  
2. Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCIs appear in the DLCI  
list box (under the agent list box).  
3. If you want to monitor one of the agent’s DLCIs, highlight the DLCI to be  
monitored.  
4. Click on an applicable icon. The selected graphical report should open.  
Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and  
Domain History. In the example below, the Domain History icon was selected,  
which is actually a real-time report.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
10-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
NOTE:  
If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been  
changed via OpenLane, the values shown for the distribution will not be  
accurate. Only default size distributions are tracked.  
Statistical Windows Supported  
(Models 9820 and 9820-2M)  
Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are  
supported for FrameSaver units. For example, All Convs (conversations) and  
TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio button is selected, but  
conversations are not supported.  
Of the icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window, the  
following are supported:  
Traffic Statistics  
Traffic Monitor  
Protocol Statistics  
Protocol Monitor  
Protocol Zoom  
TopNTalkers  
Segment Zoom  
1
Segment Details  
1
Domain History  
All Talkers  
1
Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only, not a link. If a link is selected,  
all size distribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero.  
When a DLCI is selected, the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for  
FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid bucket  
(i.e., bucket size <64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65..127 bucket, and >1518  
statistics appear in the 1024..1518 bucket).  
Conversations and Long-Term and Short-Term Histories are not supported in this  
release. As a result, no data will appear on windows that include these panes.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
10-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Network Health for  
FrameSaver Devices  
11  
FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication’s Network Health  
software. In addition, Network Health has released the first in a series of software  
modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its  
reporting package (see the FrameSaver SLV report example on page 11-9). To  
get this report, you need Network Health R4.01 or higher.  
This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver  
SLV devices. It includes the following:  
H
H
H
H
H
Installation and Setup of Network Health and reports  
Discovering FrameSaver Elements  
Configuring the Discovered Elements  
Grouping Elements for Reports  
Generating Reports for a Group  
About Service Level Reports  
About At-a-Glance Reports  
About Trend Reports  
Printed Reports  
H
Reports Applicable to SLV Devices  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
For additional information about installing, accessing, and managing FrameSaver  
SLV devices through Concord’s Network Health, and for information about  
applicable reports, refer to:  
H
H
H
Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application.  
Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application.  
Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay  
reports.  
H
Network Health – Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand  
and use Traffic Accountant reports.  
Installation and Setup of Network Health  
Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions, and  
follow the instructions applicable to your network platform. Once Network Health  
is installed, you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units.  
Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions, called a  
module. Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those  
features and functions. Make sure you license the Poller application so you can  
poll SLV units and collect data.  
To use this application:  
1. Discover network elements, units, and interfaces in the network.  
2. Configure the Network Health applications, then save them.  
3. Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes.  
4. Set up and run reports.  
Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide.  
The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once  
you have access to the applications.  
See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup  
information and a full discussion of the application’s features and how to use  
them.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Discovering FrameSaver Elements  
Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications, the Discover  
dialog box opens. Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and  
discover their DLCIs. Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the  
Poller Configuration, which are used to poll the units.  
IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be  
entered for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and discover their  
elements. These elements are resources that can be polled (e.g., LAN/WAN  
interfaces, frame relay circuits, routers, and servers).  
The two types of elements that can be polled are:  
H
H
Statistics elements – Provide counters and other gauges for information  
gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis.  
Conversation elements – Provide RMON2 and similar data for information  
gathered about network traffic between nodes.  
" Procedure  
To find SLV device elements in your network:  
1. Select the LAN/WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found.  
Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type.  
2. Enter the IP Addresses of the SLV units to be located, and the Community  
String (Community Name in the FrameSaver unit). The Community String is  
case-sensitive.  
3. Select the Discover button.  
The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens,  
showing the results of the discovery process.  
A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of  
existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete.  
Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network, it  
could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all  
elements in the network.  
See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional  
information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to  
the database.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Configuring the Discovered Elements  
Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for  
the first time. For a FrameSaver SLV unit, the speed set would be the unit’s CIR.  
No additional configuration should be required. However, you should verify that all  
appropriate information has been retrieved.  
NOTE:  
If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured, or if it is not configured correctly,  
Network Health sets the unit’s CIR to 0 kbps. For this reason, you should  
reconfigure the unit’s CIR before Network Health polls it. If 0 kbps is the  
speed setting, you will need to edit the unit’s CIR from Network Health.  
Additional information that can be edited, as well. See Discovering Elements in  
the Network Health User Guide for additional information.  
" Procedure  
To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health:  
1. Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering  
dialog box once the discovery process is completed.  
The Poller Configuration window opens.  
2. Double-click on the first element discovered. The Modify Element dialog box  
opens.  
3. In the Speed box, select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the  
unit in the text box.  
Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts (e.g., enter 56 k for 56 kilobits  
per second, or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second).  
4. Apply your changes:  
— Select the Apply/Next button to save your change and bring up the next  
element to be edited. Continue until all newly discovered frame relay  
elements have been modified before selecting the OK button.  
— Select the the OK button.  
The Modify Element dialog box closes.  
5. Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window. The  
modified elements are saved to the database, and the units are polled.  
Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for  
data to be gathered before running any reports.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Grouping Elements for Reports  
Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made, the  
newly discovered elements (DLCIs) should be organized into a group for Health  
reporting. Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node  
types (e.g., all SLV elements). Once grouped, you can then run reports on all  
DLCIs in the network, as well as reports on individual DLCIs.  
" Procedure  
To group elements:  
1. From the console, select Edit Groups from the Reports menu. The Add  
Groups dialog box opens.  
2. Enter a name in the Group Name field. Up to 64 characters can be entered.  
A through Z, a through z, 0 through 9, dashes (–), periods (.), and underscores  
(_ ) can be used. No spaces can be included, and the word All cannot be used.  
3. Select the WAN radio button (above the Available Elements list).  
4. Highlight all the DLCIs listed on the Available Elements list, or select specific  
DLCIs, then select the left arrow button.  
The highlighted DLCIs move from the Available Elements list to the  
Group Members list.  
5. Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the  
Group Members list.  
The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on  
the Groups dialog box.  
See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for  
additional information. That chapter also tells you how to customize reports.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Generating Reports for a Group  
Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCIs  
and the DLCIs have been grouped, you can start generating reports. When  
selecting a report Section, select WAN from the drop-down list. See Running  
Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional  
information. That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report  
generation.  
NOTE:  
Network Health provides information with each chart or table, generally  
referred to as a report. Click on the hyperlink (Explanation of...) for an  
explanation of the report and its features. You can also refer to the Network  
Health Reports Guide.  
About Service Level Reports  
For long-term analysis and reporting, you will want to license the Service Level  
Reports application. This application analyzes data collected over months, or by  
quarters, and provides service level information about an enterprise, a region,  
department, or business process. Executive, IT Manager, and Customer Service  
Level reports are provided.  
Using these reports, you can measure service performance against goals and  
agreements. Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables:  
availability, bandwidth, bytes, health exceptions, and latency. These ranges need  
to be set before reports are scheduled.  
About At-a-Glance Reports  
At-a-Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network  
performance indicators onto a single page. Up to ten DLCIs can be included in an  
At-a-Glance Report.  
Using the FrameSaver SLV report on page 11-9, you can compare a DLCI’s  
volume with the network’s performance over a specified period of time. Ranges  
for service level goals can be set for up to five variables: availability, bandwidth,  
bytes, health exceptions, and latency. These ranges need to be set before reports  
are scheduled. In addition, all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV  
device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of  
the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer’s utilization on  
network efficiency.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
About Trend Reports  
By specifying specific variables like bandwidth, trend analysis can be performed  
and shown on Trend Reports. Up to ten variables for a DLCI, or ten DLCIs on one  
variable can be generated on a single trend report. Information can be presented  
in a line graph, pie chart, bar chart, or table format. Any amount of time can be  
specified for the reporting period.  
These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health  
Index rating. See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index  
ratings.  
Printed Reports  
All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports.  
Reports Applicable to SLV Devices  
The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver SLV units:  
H
Exception Reports – Provide summary and detail information that identifies  
DLCIs with the highest incidence of errors, high bandwidth utilization, and  
trends.  
These reports identify those DLCIs that have exceeded a specified number of  
accumulated exception points. It is a good idea to run this report daily so that  
DLCIs having the most problems can be attended to first. DLCIs contained on  
this report need immediate attention.  
If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports, check whether any new  
equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly  
configured. If its configuration is correct, the equipment could be faulty.  
H
Summary Reports – Provide summary information for the network, volume  
and error leaders, and DLCI traffic.  
Network Summary Report – Provides an overall view of the network.  
Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into  
problems.  
Leaders Summary Report – Identifies DLCIs having the highest volume  
and errors. High traffic volume may be increasing latency, and the high  
Health Index rating indicates problems. It is a good idea to run these  
reports daily so a norm can be established. The same DLCIs should  
appear.  
Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems. Problems to  
look for include: a normally high-volume DLCI is dropped from the list, a  
new DLCI appears on the list (check Element Summaries), a DLCI has a  
high Health Index rating, but low volume, significant differences between  
a DLCI’s average and peak Health Index rating.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Elements Summary Report – Compares DLCI traffic with volume and  
the baseline, bandwidth utilization, and errors.  
Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison, to identify  
DLCIs with above or below average volume so they can be investigated  
when there are any significant changes.  
H
H
Supplemental Report – Shows DLCI availability and latency. The  
information shown in this report is also on other Health reports. However,  
these charts show more than ten DLCIs at a time so you have a broader view  
of the service provided by the network.  
Service Level Reports – Provide summary information for a group list for a  
longer reporting period than other reports.  
Executive Service Level Report – Provides service level performance  
for an enterprise on a single page. Use this report to assess whether IT  
service levels are meeting availability and service goals.  
IT Manager Service Level Report – Provides service level information  
for various groups. Using this report, you can compare service level  
performance of various groups. The report summarizes service levels for  
a group of DLCIs, along with details on individual DLCIs within that  
group.  
Customer Service Level Report – Provides service level information for  
customers. This report is used to provide service level information to  
service customers to help them determine optimum service levels  
needed based upon their own traffic data, as well as provide documented  
evidence for increasing CIR. It combines daily volume, daily Health  
exceptions, bandwidth distribution, average Health Index ratings and  
availability for each DLCI onto a single page.  
H
At-a-Glance Reports – Provides consolidated DLCI and network  
performance information onto a single page.  
At-a-Glance Report – Consolidates bandwidth utilization, network traffic,  
events occurring over the reporting period, and availability and latency  
levels information. Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a  
trend report (e.g., burst octets), but a bandwidth trend report should be  
generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions  
Reports, Supplemental Reports, and Health reports.  
Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high  
Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem  
leading to a DLCI’s poor Health Index rating.  
FrameSaver SLV Plus At-a-Glance Report Performs trend analysis  
on up to ten specified variables for DLCIs (see page 11-9 for an  
example). This is the first Network Health report to integrate  
the FrameSaver SLV’s unique monitoring capabilities, using the unit’s  
SLV-enhanced network statistics.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
H
Trend Reports – Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for  
DLCIs. Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report  
(e.g., burst octets), but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when  
investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports, Supplemental  
Reports, and Health reports.  
Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health  
Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a  
DLCI’s poor Health Index rating.  
See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
This page intentionally left blank.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
11-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Maintenance  
(9820-45M)  
12  
Overview  
The FrameSaver SLV 9820-45M is designed for years of trouble-free service.  
There are actions you can take to further reduce the likelihood and amount of  
down time:  
Area of Concern  
Action  
Front Panel Assembly  
1. Vacuum dust from air vents whenever a buildup is  
visible. See Cleaning the Front Panel Assembly on  
page 12-2.  
2. Monitor LEDs for fan failures. Replace the front panel  
assembly immediately upon failure. See Replacing the  
Front Panel Assembly on page 12-3.  
3. Test LEDs periodically. Replace the front panel  
assembly immediately upon failure. See Replacing the  
Front Panel Assembly on page 12-3.  
Power Modules  
Monitor LEDs for power module failures. Replace a failed  
power module immediately. See Replacing a Power  
Module on page 12-4.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Maintenance (9820-45M)  
Cleaning the Front Panel Assembly  
The substantial airflow through the unit’s four fans may cause dust to collect on  
the outside of the front air vents. When dust becomes visible at the air vents, run  
the brush attachment of a vacuum cleaner gently over the front panel to remove  
it.  
In extremely dusty environments it may be necessary to remove the front panel  
assembly to clean the blades of the fans. Refer all service to qualified personnel.  
The procedure may be performed while the unit is running.  
" Procedure  
To clean the fans:  
1. Loosen the captive screws holding on the front panel.  
!
WARNING:  
The fans continue to run until the fan power cable is removed. Keep  
your hair and clothes away from the fan blades.  
2. Carefully pull the front panel toward you.  
3. Remove the fan power cable and LED ribbon cable.  
4. Lay the front panel face-down on a flat surface.  
5. Vacuum the fan blades and cages with the brush attachment of a vacuum  
cleaner.  
!
WARNING:  
Each fan starts spinning as soon as the fan power cable is  
reconnected. Keep your hair and clothes away from the fan blades.  
6. Reconnect the LED ribbon cable, then reconnect the fan power cable. Verify  
that all four fans are running.  
7. Replace the front panel and tighten the captive screws.  
CAUTION:  
Do not leave the front panel assembly off the unit for extended periods,  
or the unit will overheat.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Maintenance (9820-45M)  
Replacing the Front Panel Assembly  
The System FAN LED on the front panel turns on when one or more of the front  
panel fans has failed. Replace the front panel assembly as soon as possible after  
this occurs. Refer all service to qualified personnel.  
The procedure may be performed while the unit is running.  
" Procedure  
To replace the front panel:  
1. Loosen the captive screws holding on the front panel.  
!
WARNING:  
The fans continue to run until the fan power cable is removed. Keep  
your hair and clothes away from the fan blades.  
2. Carefully pull the front panel toward you. Verify that at least one of the fans  
has failed.  
3. Remove the fan power cable and LED ribbon cable, and set the old front  
panel assembly aside.  
!
WARNING:  
Each fan starts spinning as soon as the fan power cable is  
reconnected. Keep your hair and clothes away from the fan blades.  
4. Take the new front panel and connect the LED cable, then connect the fan  
power cable. Verify that all four fans are running.  
5. Replace the front panel and tighten the captive screws. Verify that the FAN  
LED is turned off.  
CAUTION:  
Do not leave the front panel assembly off the unit for extended periods,  
or the unit will overheat.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Maintenance (9820-45M)  
Replacing a Power Module  
A power module requires replacement in a FrameSaver SLV 9820-45M when:  
H
H
The front panel System PWR LED is lit. This means that one of the power  
modules has failed.  
Power is applied to a power module and it is switched on, but the power  
module LED does not light.  
Refer all service to qualified personnel.  
" Procedure  
To replace a power module:  
1. For a system with redundant power, determine which power module still has  
its power LED lit. This is the functional power supply.  
!
WARNING:  
Do not pull out a power module until the power cord has been  
removed.  
2. Remove the power cord from the failed power module.  
3. Unscrew the captive screw holding the failed power module in place.  
4. Pull out the power module and set it aside.  
5. Slide in the new power module until it seats in its connector. Verify that the  
switch is in the Off position.  
6. Tighten the captive screw.  
7. Replace the power cord. Move the power module switch to the On position.  
8. Verify that the power module LED is lit and that the front panel System PWR  
LED is off.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
12-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu Hierarchy  
A
Menus  
The following is a graphical representation of the FrameSaver SLV unit’s menu  
organization.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu Hierarchy  
Menu Hierarchy  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Status  
System and Test Status  
LMI Reported DLCIs  
PVC Connection Status  
Network Interface Status  
IP Routing Table  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
Performance Statistics  
Trap Event Log  
Easy Install  
*
Display LEDs and  
Control Leads  
Identity  
Performance  
Statistics  
Trap Event  
Log  
Identity – System  
and NAM  
System and Network LMI  
PVC Connection Network  
IP Routing  
Table  
Test Status  
Reported  
DLCIs  
Status  
Interface  
Status  
• Service Level  
Verification  
• DLCI  
• Time Elapsed  
Since Event  
• Event  
• System Name,  
Contact and  
Location  
• Self-Test  
Results  
• Health and  
Status  
• Source Link,  
DLCI, EDLCI  
• Primary  
Destination Link,  
DLCI, EDLCI,  
Status  
• Destination  
• Mask  
• Gateway  
• Hop  
Type  
• Interface  
• TTL  
• DLCI  
• Status  
• CIR (bps)  
• Operating  
Rate  
• Frame Relay  
• Serial Number  
Test Status  
• Ethernet  
• Clear All Statistics  
• Current and  
Alternate Software  
Revisions  
• Hardware Revision  
• Ethernet MAC Address  
*
• Last System  
Reset  
• Alternate  
Destination Link,  
DLCI, EDLCI,  
*
Status  
*
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Test  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
PVC Tests:  
Network  
Data Port  
Physical Tests:  
Data Port  
Other:  
IP Ping  
Lamp Test  
Abort All Tests  
PVC Tests  
Easy Install  
*
(DLCI Number)  
• PVC Loopback  
• Send Pattern  
• Monitor Pattern  
Data Port  
Physical Tests  
IP Ping  
• IP Address  
• Status  
• DTE Loopback  
Connectivity  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
Load  
Configuration  
from:  
Configuration  
Edit/Display  
System  
Network  
Easy Install  
Data Ports  
*
PVC Connections  
Management and  
Communication  
Network and  
Data Ports  
System  
PVC Connection  
Table  
Management and  
Communication Options  
Frame Relay and LMI  
Service Level  
Verification  
Physical  
Frame Relay  
DLCI Records  
Source Link, DLCI,  
EDLCI  
Node IP  
Management PVCs  
General SNMP Management  
Telnet and FTP Session  
SNMP NMS Security  
SNMP Traps  
General  
Primary Destination Link,  
DLCI, EDLCI  
• Alternate Destination Link,  
DLCI, EDLCI  
• Ethernet Port  
New or Modify  
*
**9820-45M  
New or Modify  
Communication Port  
External Modem**  
**9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M  
Management  
PVC Entry  
• Modem Port  
*
PVC Connection Entry  
00-16786a  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Hierarchy  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
Auto-Configuration  
Frame Relay  
Discovery Mode  
Easy Install*  
Automatic Circuit Removal  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
Control  
Modem Call Directories**  
Easy Install*  
System Information  
Administer Logins  
Change Operating Mode  
Select Software Release  
LMI Packet Capture Utility  
Disconnect Modem  
Reset Device  
System Information  
Administer Logins  
Select Software Release  
LMI Packet Capture Utility  
Device Name  
System Name,  
Location, Contact  
Date  
Login ID  
Password  
Access Level  
• Current Release  
• Alternate Release  
• Switch & Reset  
• Capture Interface  
• Packet Capture Start/Stop  
• Status  
• Packets in Buffer  
Time  
New  
Display LMI Trace Log  
LMI Trace Log  
Login Entry  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
Easy Install*  
Easy Install  
• Node IP Address  
• Node Subnet Mask  
• TS Access  
• Create Management Link  
• Ethernet Port Options  
**9820-45M  
**9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M  
00-16786b  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Hierarchy  
This page intentionally left blank.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and  
RMON Alarm Defaults  
B
This appendix contains the following:  
H
H
H
MIB Support  
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps  
System Group (mib-2)  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1)  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2)  
Interfaces Group (mib-2)  
H
H
Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)  
NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)  
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps  
Trap: warmStart  
Trap: authenticationFailure  
Traps: linkUp and linkDown  
Traps: enterprise-Specific  
Traps: RMON-Specific  
H
H
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults  
Network Synchronous Port Physical Interface Alarm Defaults  
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area  
DLCI Alarm Defaults  
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order)  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
MIB Support  
The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1, and has the capability of  
being managed by any industry-standard SNMP manager and accessed by  
external SNMP managers using the SNMP protocol.  
The following MIBs are supported:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
MIB II (RFC 1213 and RFC 1573)  
Frame Relay DTEs MIB (RFC 2115)  
RS-232-Like MIB (RFC 1659)  
Frame Relay Service MIB (RFC 1604)  
Enterprise MIB  
RMON Version 1 MIB (RFC 1757)  
RMON Version 2 MIB (RFC 2021)  
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps  
Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World  
Wide Web site.  
" Procedure  
To access Paradyne MIBs:  
1. Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www.paradyne.com.  
2. Select Technical Support.  
3. Select Management Information Base (MIBs).  
The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS  
application software. Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional  
download information.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
System Group (mib-2)  
This section provides the system description and system object identifier for the  
System Group for a FrameSaver SLV 9820 unit, which is an SNMPv1 MIB.  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1)  
The following is the system description (sysDescr [system 1]) for the NMS  
subsystem in the FrameSaver SLV 9820 unit:  
PARADYNE DP FrameSaver SLV; Model: [9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M, or  
9820-45M]; S/W Release: (MM.mm.bb [MM=Major.mm=minor.bb=build]  
format); NAM CCA number: (hardware version in hhhh-hhh format); Serial  
number: sssssss  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2)  
The following is the system object identifier (sysObjectID [system 2]), or OID, for  
the NMS subsystem in the following FrameSaver SLV 9820 units:  
H
H
H
H
FrameSaver SLV 9820: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.7.1  
FrameSaver SLV 9820-2M: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.7.2  
FrameSaver SLV 9820-8M: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.7.3  
FrameSaver SLV 9820-45M: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.7.4  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Interfaces Group (mib-2)  
Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group, as defined in RFC 1573 and  
RFC 1213, which is an SNMPv1 MIB, is provided in this section.  
Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)  
The following table provides the ifName for each interface type, the ifDescr, and  
the ifIndex that Paradyne has assigned to each.  
Table B-1. Paradyne Interface Objects Information  
ifName  
Description  
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)  
ifIndex  
Physical Layer  
Sync Data Port Synchronous  
Synchronous Data Port, Slot: 1, 101003001  
Port: 1; DP FR NAM; Hardware  
Version: hhhh-hhh  
S01P1  
Data Port  
Network Sync  
Data Port  
S01P2  
Network Synchronous Network Synchronous  
101003002  
Data Port  
Data Port, Slot: 1, Port: 2;  
DP FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
COM  
Communications port  
(Terminal port on  
9820-45M)  
COM Port; DP FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
101004001  
Modem  
Modem port  
(9820-45M only)  
Modem Port; DP FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
101005001  
101006001  
Ethernet  
LAN port  
Ethernet Port; DP FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
Frame Relay Logical Layer  
FR UNI Frame relay logical  
101016001  
For the user side:  
link on the  
Synchronous  
Data Port  
Synchronous Data Port of FR  
DTE, Slot: 1, Port: 1; DP FR  
NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
For the network side:  
Synchronous Data Port of FR  
SERVICE, Slot: 1, Port: 1; DP  
FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
Frame relay logical  
link on the Network  
Synchronous  
101016002  
For the user side:  
Network Synchronous Data Port  
of FR DTE, Slot: 1, Port: 1;  
DP FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
Data Port  
For the network side:  
Network Synchronous Data Port  
of FR SERVICE, Slot: 1, Port: 1;  
DP FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)  
For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with  
NetScout Probes, use the following ifName, ifDescr, and ifIndex.  
Table B-2. NetScout Interface Objects Information  
ifName  
Description  
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)  
ifIndex  
Frame Relay Logical Layer  
Frame Relay 4 Network Synchronous  
4
For the user side:  
Network  
V.35/X.21  
Data Port  
RMON (IN/OUT); Network  
Synchronous Data Port of  
FR DTE, Slot: 1, Port: 2;  
DP FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
For the network side:  
RMON (IN/OUT); Network  
Synchronous Data Port of  
FR SERVICE, Slot: 1, Port: 2;  
DP FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
RMON Logical Layer  
RMON Frame  
Relay Logical  
Interfaces  
(9820 and  
9820-2M)  
These values are  
calculated.  
1748  
OUT – RMON (IN);  
[ifName of the interface]  
H For the DTE:  
(ifIndex –1) * 2 +17  
OUT – RMON (OUT);  
[ifName of the interface]  
H For the DCE: DTE  
calculated value +1  
RMON Virtual  
Interfaces  
These values are  
calculated based on  
the probe’s internal  
circuit index: circuit  
index +65.  
65512  
(9820 and  
9820-2M)  
65 –  
100000000  
(9820-8M  
and  
9820-45M)  
RMON Virtual  
Logical  
Interfaces  
(9820 and  
9820-2M)  
These values are  
calculated.  
5131023  
IN – VIRTUAL PVC  
[interface number]  
[DLCI number] DTE  
H For the DTE:  
(virtual interface  
ifIndex 65) * 2  
+513  
OUT – VIRTUAL PVC  
[interface number]  
[DLCI number] DCE  
H For the DCE:  
DTE calculated  
value +1  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps  
This section describes the FrameSaver unit’s compliance with SNMP format  
standards and with its special operational trap features.  
All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap.  
Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing $ifString have the  
following format:  
‘DLCI $dlciNumber “$circuitId” of $ifName frame relay link “$linkName”.’  
— $dlciNumber is the DLCI number. DLCI $dlciNumberonly appears  
when a DLCI is associated with the trap.  
— $circuitId is the name given to the circuit. It can be an empty string, or a  
1– 64 byte string within quotes (e.g., “Chicago to New York”), and only  
appears when a DLCI with “circuitID” is associated with the trap.  
— $linkName is the name given to the link. Frame relay $linkNameonly  
appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with  
the trap.  
— $ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable.  
Example:  
‘DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay’  
In this example, a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap.  
The unit supports the following traps:  
H
H
H
H
H
warmStart  
authenticationFailure  
linkUp and linkDown  
enterprise-Specific  
RMON-Specific  
These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Trap: warmStart  
This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized.  
Table B-3. warmStart Trap  
Trap  
What It Indicates  
Possible Cause  
warmStart  
H Reset command sent.  
H Power disruption.  
FrameSaver unit has just  
reinitialized and stabilized  
itself.  
String:  
‘Unit reset.’  
Variable-Binding  
devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.mib)  
Trap: authenticationFailure  
This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to  
lack of authentication.  
Table B-4. authenticationFailure Trap  
Trap  
What It Indicates  
Possible Cause  
authenticationFailure  
Access to the FrameSaver  
unit was attempted and  
failed.  
H SNMP protocol message not  
properly authenticated.  
H Three unsuccessful attempts  
were made to enter a correct  
login user ID/password  
combination.  
H IP Address security is enabled  
and a message was received  
from the SNMP Manager  
whose address was not on the  
lost of approved managers.  
String:  
‘Unauthorized access attempted.’  
Variable-Binding  
devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.mib)  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Traps: linkUp and linkDown  
These traps are supported on the following interfaces:  
H
H
Network and synchronous data ports – Physical sublayer interfaces  
Frame relay logical link layer interfaces  
Table B-5. linkUp and linkDown Traps  
Trap  
What It Indicates  
Possible Cause  
linkDown  
A failure in one of the  
communication interfaces  
has occurred.  
A failure in one of the  
communication interfaces has  
occurred.  
linkUp  
One of the failed  
communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational.  
One of the failed communication  
up and operational.  
linkUp and linkDown variable-bindings are in Table B-6.  
Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II  
Interfaces Table. It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension  
MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (1 of 2)  
Interface  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
Physical Sublayer  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
Network Synchronous  
Data Port  
H linkDown – One or more alarm  
conditions are active on the  
port.  
H ifAdminStatus  
(RFC 1573)  
If the interface is configured to  
monitor the control lead,  
alarms are generated as  
shown in Table B-7.  
(Supported by the  
media-specific  
RS232-like MIB.)  
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
String:  
‘$ifString $alarmString down.’  
(e.g., ‘Sync Data Port S01P2  
DTR and RTS down.)  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an  
intentional shutdown.)  
H linkUp – No alarms on the  
port.  
If the interface is configured to  
monitor the control lead,  
alarms are generated as  
shown in Table B-7.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
User Synchronous  
Data Port  
H linkDown – One or more alarm  
conditions are active on the  
port.  
If the interface is configured to  
monitor the control lead,  
alarms are generated as  
shown in Table B-7.  
(Supported by the  
media-specific  
RS232-like MIB.)  
String:  
‘$ifString $alarmString down.’  
(e.g., ‘Sync Data Port S01P1  
DTR down.)  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an  
intentional shutdown.)  
H linkUp – No alarms on the  
port.  
If the interface is configured to  
monitor the control lead,  
alarms are generated as  
shown in Table B-7.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (2 of 2)  
Interface  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
Physical Sublayer, continued  
Ethernet Port  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H linkDown – Communications  
are not possible on the port.  
H ifAdminStatus  
String:  
(RFC 1573)  
‘Ethernet $alarmString down.’  
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
H linkUp – Communications are  
now possible on the port.  
String:  
‘Ethernet up.’  
Logical Link Sublayer  
Frame Relay  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H linkDown – LMI is down for  
the LMI Protocol configured,  
or Frame Relay link is  
disabled.  
(Supported by the  
media-specific Frame  
Relay Services MIB.)  
H ifAdminStatus  
(RFC 1573)  
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
If the LMI Protocol is not  
configured, a linkUp/linkDown  
trap is based solely upon  
whether the interface is  
enabled or disabled.  
Strings:  
‘$ifString down.’ No alarms  
exist on the link due to LMI.  
‘$ifString LMI down.’ No  
alarms exist on the link  
because LMI is down.  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an  
intentional shutdown.)  
H linkUp – LMI is up or Frame  
Relay link is enabled.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-7. Input Control Leads That Generate linkDown and linkUp Traps  
V.35 and EIA-530-A  
X.21  
HSSI  
DCE  
S
DTE  
U
DCE  
S
DTE  
U
DCE  
U
DTE  
U
Signal Name  
RTS (Control)  
CTS  
U
S
U
U
U
U
DSR (CA)  
U
S
U
U
U
S
DTR (TA)  
S
U
U
U
S
U
RLSD (Indication)  
U
S
U
S
U
U
S = Supported, U = Unsupported  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Traps: enterprise-Specific  
These traps indicate that an enterprise-specific event has occurred. Supported  
enterprise-specific traps are listed below.  
Table B-8. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (1 of 2)  
Trap  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
enterpriseCIR-  
Change(15)  
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex  
CIR has changed due to the LMI  
report. LMI Protocol is set to  
Standard and the network’s CIR  
changed.  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devFrExtDlciDlci  
(devFrExt.mib)  
String:  
H devFrExtDlciCIR  
‘CIR on $ifString changed to  
$CIR bps.’  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
enterpriseConfig-  
Change(6)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
Configuration has been changed  
via the menu-driven user  
interface, an SNMP Manager,  
or auto-configuration after 60  
seconds has elapsed without  
another change.  
String:  
‘Device configuration change.’  
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex  
enterpriseDLCI-  
delete(17)  
The DLCI has been deleted. The  
network no longer supports the  
DLCI, and it was removed.  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devFrExtDlciDlci  
(devFrExt.mib)  
Strings:  
‘$ifString deleted by Auto-DLCI  
delete.’  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib.)  
enterpriseDLCI-  
Down(11)  
DLCI Status is set to Inactive; the  
DLCI is down.  
Strings:  
‘$ifString down.’ (Due to LMI or  
physical failure.)  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an intentional  
shutdown.)  
enterpriseDLCIUp(12)  
DLCI Status is set to Active;  
DLCI is up again.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
enterpriseLinkSpeed-  
Change(14)  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H ifSpeed (RFC 1573)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib  
Speed has changed as a result  
the Autorate algorithm.  
String:  
‘Speed of $ifName changed to  
$ifSpeed bps.’  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-8. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (2 of 2)  
Trap  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex  
enterpriseMissedSLV-  
Down(16)  
SLV Timeout Error Event  
Threshold has been exceeded.  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devFrExtDlciDlci  
String:  
(devFrExt.mib)  
‘SLV down on $ifString due to  
excessive SLV packet loss. Total  
SLV packets lost is $numLost.’  
H devFrExtDlciMissed-  
SLVs (devFrExt.mib)  
enterpriseMissedSLV-  
Up(116)  
SLV Timeout Error Event has  
been cleared.  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib.)  
String:  
‘SLV up on $ifString because  
SLV communication was  
reestablished. Total SLV packets  
lost is $numLost.’  
enterpriseRMON-  
ResetToDefault(13)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
All RMON-related option  
changes have been reset to their  
default values.  
Default Factory Configuration  
settings have been reloaded,  
returning RMON-related options  
to their original settings.  
String:  
‘RMON database reset to  
defaults.’  
enterpriseSelfTest-  
Fail(2)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
Unit has completed  
(re)initialization and a hardware  
failure was detected.  
String:  
‘Self test failed: $s.’ ($s is the  
contents of devSelfTestResult.)  
For physical interfaces and  
frame relay links:  
enterpriseTest-  
Start(5)  
At least one test has been  
started on an interface or virtual  
circuit.  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H .0.0 (placeholder)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib  
String:  
‘$testString test started on  
$ifString.’ (e.g., ‘DTE Loopback  
test started on Sync Data Port  
S01P1.’)  
For virtual circuits (DLCIs):  
enterpriseTest-  
Stop(105)  
All tests have been halted on an  
interface or virtual circuit.  
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex  
(devFrExt.mib)  
String:  
H devFrExtDlciDlci  
‘$testString test stopped on  
$ifString.’ (e.g., ‘Disruptive PVC  
Loopback test stopped on  
DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port  
S01P1 frame relay.’)  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Traps: RMON-Specific  
Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON. See  
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults for the default values that will generate  
RMON-specific traps.  
Table B-9. RMON-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings  
Trap  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
risingAlarm  
H alarmIndex (RFC 1757)  
Object being monitored has risen  
above the set threshold.  
H alarmVariable  
(RFC 1757)  
String:  
‘Change in $variableName  
$typeString threshold of  
$alarmRisingThreshold by  
$(alarmValue –  
alarmRisingThreshold.’  
(e.g., ‘Octets received on Sync  
Data Port S01P1 frame relay  
rose to threshold of 1.’)  
H alarmSampleType  
(RFC 1757)  
H alarmValue (RFC 1757)  
H alarmRisingThreshold or  
alarm Falling Threshold  
(RFC 1757)  
$typeString is ’rose to’  
if alarmValue equals  
alarmRisingThreshold;  
otherwise, it is ’exceeded’.  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
fallingAlarm  
H alarmIndex (RFC 1757)  
Object being monitored has  
fallen below the set threshold.  
H alarmVariable  
(RFC 1757)  
String:  
‘Change in $variableName  
$typeString threshold of  
$alarmRisingThreshold by  
$(alarmFallingThreshold –  
alarmValue).’  
(e.g., ‘Octets received on Sync  
Data Port S01P1 frame relay  
rose to threshold of 1.’)  
H alarmSampleType  
(RFC 1757)  
H alarmValue (RFC 1757)  
H alarmFallingThreshold  
(RFC 1757)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
$typeString is ’fell to’  
if alarmValue equals  
alarmFallingThreshold;  
otherwise, it is ’fell below’.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults  
The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event  
information. Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor. When the threshold  
set for the monitored variable is exceeded, an SNMP trap or a log event is sent.  
Event Defaults  
Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit, there is no  
need to define multiple events for each alarm type, so only the following two  
events need to be generated:  
eventIndex eventDescription  
eventType  
eventCommunity  
1
2
Default SLV Rising Event log-and-trap(4)  
Default SLV Falling Event log-and-trap(4)  
0
0
The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default  
alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit, shows the alarm and event types, the  
interval used when generating alarms, and thresholds.  
H
H
H
H
Physical Interface Alarm Defaults  
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area  
DLCI Alarm Defaults  
See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps for information about how traps  
work, and Traps: RMON-Specific for traps specific to remote monitoring.  
Rising Event Operation  
If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table (e.g., frames  
dropped by the network), the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the  
end of the interval. Only one alarm per event per interval is generated. The alarm  
condition persists until the event has been disarmed (reset).  
The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising  
threshold has not been crossed during an interval, allowing the event to return to  
its original disarmed state.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Network Synchronous Port Physical Interface Alarm Defaults  
These alarms only apply to the FrameSaver unit’s network data port interface.  
They are created during RMON initialization and put into the Paradyne-defined  
alarm area.  
Table B-10. Network Synchronous Port Physical Interface Alarm Defaults  
Rising  
Falling  
Threshold Threshold  
Sample  
Type  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Default  
Unavailable  
Seconds  
D
MIB: pdn_SyncPortStats.mib (E) 900 secs Rising  
1
1
(15 mins)  
Tag: devSyncPortStatsUASs  
OID:.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.-  
2.6.6.5.1.1.2.I  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults  
These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit’s frame relay link interfaces. They are  
created during RMON initialization.  
Table B-11. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults (1 of 2)  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
Invalid Frames  
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.18.I  
Short Frames  
Long Frames  
Rx Discards  
Tx Discards  
D
D
D
D
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.6.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.7.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.15.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxDiscards  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.14.I  
Rx Total Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.20.I  
Tx Total Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.19.I  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-11. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults (2 of 2)  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
Rx Overruns  
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxOverruns  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.28.I  
Tx Underruns  
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkTx-  
Underruns  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.29.I  
Rx Non-octet Aligns  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRx-  
NonOctet  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.16.I  
Rx CRC Errors  
Total LMI Errors  
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.17.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotal-  
LMIErrs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.32.I  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area  
These alarms apply to all DLCIs on the network interface and can be created  
during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created. They are put into the  
Paradyne alarm area.  
Table B-12. DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area (1 of 2)  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
DLCI Inactive  
Seconds  
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs  
(15 mins)  
Rising  
1
1
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactive-  
Secs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D  
Missing Latency  
Responses  
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs  
(15 mins)  
Rising  
Rising  
5
1
5
1
Tag: devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.1.1.23.I.D  
Rx FECNs  
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
4.I.D  
Rx BECNs  
D
D
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Rising  
Rising  
Rising  
1
5
1
1
5
1
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
5.I.D  
Congested Seconds  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciSts-  
CongestedSecs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.2.1.6.I.D  
Frames Dropped by  
Network  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciNetDropFr  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-12. DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area (2 of 2)  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
Maximum Latency  
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtLatencyMax  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Rising  
1
1
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.3.1.6.I.D  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
D = DLCI number.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
DLCI Alarm Defaults  
These alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is  
created. For Models 9820 and 9820-2M, they are put into the NetScout alarm  
area; for Models 9820-8M and 9820-45M they are grouped with the DLCI Alarm  
Defaults in the Paradyne area.  
Table B-13 identifies alarm defaults that do not change, and Table B-14 identifies  
alarm defaults that change when the interface’s line speed changes.  
The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so  
they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider. Up  
to eight alarms per interface are allowed. Any additional alarms are added to the  
Paradyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software.  
See Editing Alarms in Chapter 10, Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for  
FrameSaver Devices.  
Table B-13. Static DLCI Alarm Defaults (1 of 2)  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
Current Latency  
A
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
None  
None  
None  
Must be  
configured.  
0
Tag: devFrExtLatencyLatest  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.3.1.7.I.D  
Average Latency  
Frames Received  
A
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg  
900 secs  
(15 mins)  
Must be  
configured.  
0
0
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D  
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Must be  
configured.  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
8.I.D  
Frames Sent  
D
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
None  
None  
Must be  
configured.  
0
0
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
6.I.D  
Tx Frames  
Exceeding CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Must be  
configured.  
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
D = DLCI number.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-13. Static DLCI Alarm Defaults (2 of 2)  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
Tx CIR Utilization  
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
None  
Must be  
configured.  
0
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
7.I.D  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
D = DLCI number.  
Table B-14. Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default Default  
Falling  
Sample  
Type  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Rx DLCI Link  
Utilization  
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs.  
(1 min)  
Rising  
70% of link 65% of link  
capability capability  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
9.I.D  
Tx DLCI Link  
Utilization  
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs.  
(1 min)  
Rising  
70% of link 65% of link  
capability capability  
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
7.I.D  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
D = DLCI number.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order)  
The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event  
information. Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor. When the threshold  
set for the monitored variable is exceeded, an SNMP trap is sent and/or a log  
entry is made.  
This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing  
the NetScout Custom History screen (shown below), which provides the OID  
instead of the alarm condition.  
See Table B-15 for an RMON history OID cross-reference and Table B-16 for an  
RMON alarm OID cross-reference.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (1 of 4)  
1
Object ID (OID)  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5.I  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
Link Speed  
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)  
Tag: ifSpeed  
All DLCI + LMI Rx Octets  
All DLCI + LMI Tx Octets  
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)  
Tag: ifInOctets  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.I  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.I  
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)  
Tag: ifOutOctets  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.10.32.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.4.I.D  
Rx FECNs  
Rx BECNs  
Tx Frames  
Tx Octets  
Rx Frames  
Rx Octets  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.5.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.12.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.12.2.1.2.P  
Protocol Octets  
(for 11 protocols)  
MIB: RMON II (RFC 2021)  
Tag: protocolDistStatsOctets  
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link  
D = DLCI number  
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size  
H = Host control index  
P = Protocol index  
T = The time mask  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (2 of 4)  
1
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.16.I  
Rx Non-octet Aligns  
IP Top Listeners (16)  
IP Top Talkers (16)  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.13.1.2.1.4.H.T.N  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devRmonIPTopNDstIP  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.13.1.2.1.6.H.T.N  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devRmonIPTopNSrcIP  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.3.I.D  
DLCI CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciFrCIR  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.7.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.8.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.18.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.22.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.37.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.39.I.D  
Tx DEs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxDE  
Tx BECNs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrCircuitTxBECN  
Tx Frames Above CIR  
Rx Frames Above CIR  
Network Frames Lost  
Rx DEs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRxFrOutCIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciNetDropFr  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRxDE  
Network Frames Offered  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFr  
Network Frames Offered  
In CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFrInCir  
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link  
D = DLCI number  
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size  
H = Host control index  
P = Protocol index  
T = The time mask  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (3 of 4)  
1
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4 . . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.41.I.D  
Network Frames Dropped  
In CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciDropOffFrInCir  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.43.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.45.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.55.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.57.I.D  
Network Frames Offered  
Above CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFrOutCir  
Network Frames Lost  
Above CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciRmtDropFrOutCir  
Network Frames Offered  
Above CIR Within EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciDropFrCirToEir  
Network Frames Dropped  
Above CIR Within EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrNetDrop-  
CirToEir  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.59.I.D  
Network Frames Offered  
Above EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciOfferedFrOverEir  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.61.I.D  
Network Frames Dropped  
Above EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrNetDrop-  
OverEir  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.63.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.6.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.8.I.D  
DLCI EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciEir  
DLCI Inactive Seconds  
Average Latency  
Maximum Latency  
Latency Packet Size  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyMax  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyPacketSz  
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link  
D = DLCI number  
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size  
H = Host control index  
P = Protocol index  
T = The time mask  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-15. History OID Cross-Reference (4 of 4)  
1
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.2.I.D.N  
Burst Upper Limit (15)  
Burst Octets (15)  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtBurstUpLimit  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.3.I.D.N  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtBurstOctets  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.4.I.D.N  
Burst Frames (15)  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtBurstFrames  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.2.I  
LMI Unavailable Seconds  
Total Rx CRC Errors  
Total Tx Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.17.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.19.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.20.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.32.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs  
Total Rx Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs  
Total LMI Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.2.I.N  
Port Burst Upper Limits 14 MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.3.I.N  
Rx Port Burst Octets 15  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.4.I.N  
Tx Port Burst Octets 15  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets  
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link  
D = DLCI number  
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size  
H = Host control index  
P = Protocol index  
T = The time mask  
See Table B-16 for an RMON alarm OID cross-reference.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-16. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (1 of 2)  
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.4.I.D  
Rx FECNs  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.5.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D  
Rx BECNs  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs  
Frames Sent  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames  
Tx CIR Utilization  
Tx DLCI Link Utilization  
Frames Received  
Rx DLCI Link Utilization  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.6.5.1.1.2.I  
Unavailable Seconds  
MIB: pdn_SyncPortStats.mib (E)  
Tag: devSyncPortStatsUAS  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D  
Tx Frames Exceeding CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.23.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.6.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D  
Frames Dropped by Network MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: frFrExtDlciNetDropFr  
Missing Latency Responses MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs  
Congested Seconds  
DLCI Inactive Seconds  
Average Latency  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsCongestedSecs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-16. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (2 of 2)  
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.7.I.D  
Current Latency  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyLatest  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.2.I.N  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.3.I.N  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.6.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.7.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.11.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.14.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.15.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.16.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.17.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.18.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.19.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.20.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.28.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.29.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.32.I  
Frame Size Upper Limits  
15  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit  
Frame Size Count 15  
Rx Short Frames  
Rx Long Frames  
LMI Sequence Errors  
Tx Discards  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzCount  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkSeqErr  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxDiscards  
Rx Discards  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards  
Rx Nonoctet Aligns  
Rx CRC Errors  
Rx Illegal Frames  
Tx Total Errors  
Rx Total Errors  
Rx Overruns  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxOverruns  
Tx Underruns  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns  
Total LMI Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
B-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
B-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors, Cables, and  
Pin Assignments  
C
This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit rear panels, and pin assignments for  
the connectors/interfaces and cables.  
NOTE:  
In the pin assignment tables of this appendix, if the pin number is not shown,  
it is not being used.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
Rear Panels  
The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver 9820, 9820-2M,  
and 9820-8M models.  
98-16189  
The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver 9820-45M.  
4
5
3
2
1
Terminal  
Port  
Modem  
LAN  
TERINAL  
1
POR  
T
3
2
4
5
LAN  
00-16783  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
COM (Terminal) Port Connector  
The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the DB25  
communication port connector. The communication port is called the Terminal  
port on the Model 9820-45M.  
Signal  
Direction  
Pin #  
Shield  
1
Transmit Data (TXD)  
Received Data (RXD)  
Request to Send (RTS)  
Carrier Detect (CD)  
Signal Ground (SG)  
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
To COM port (In)  
From COM port (Out)  
To COM port (In)  
From COM port (Out)  
To/From COM port  
To COM port (In)  
2
3
4
5, 6, 8  
7
20  
LAN Adapter Converter and Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
The following shows the pin assignments for the:  
H
H
DB25 plug-to-modular jack converter between the COM (Terminal) port and  
the 8-conductor LAN Adapter cable (Feature No. 3100-F1-920)  
Custom 8-conductor cable (with modular plugs on both ends) between the  
converter and the LAN Adapter (Feature No. 3100-F2-910)  
Plug-to-Modular  
Jack Converter  
Cable  
Com Port  
8-Position  
Plug to  
Plug to  
(DB25 Plug)  
Modular Jack  
Modular Jack  
LAN Adapter  
Tx Clock 15  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Unused  
Rx Data  
3
7
2
DTR  
Signal Ground  
Tx Data  
Tx Data  
Signal Ground  
Rx Data  
CTS  
DTR 20  
CD  
8
4
RTS  
Frame Ground  
Unused  
Rx Clock 17  
98-16214  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
Standard EIA-232 Crossover Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
A standard EIA-232 crossover cable can be used to connect the COM port to an  
external modem. This is an EIA-232 plug-to EIA-232 plug (DB25-to-DB25) cable.  
The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with the FrameSaver  
unit. See page C-5 to configure an external modem.  
Pin 14  
Pin 1  
P1  
Plug  
P2  
Plug  
Pin 14  
Pin 1  
Pin 25  
Pin 13  
Pin 25  
Pin 13  
P1  
Pin  
Pin  
P2  
Chassis Ground  
1
Chassis Ground  
1
2
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
2
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
3
3
4
4
5
5
DSR  
6
DSR  
Signal Ground  
CD (RLSD)  
6
Signal Ground  
CD (RLSD)  
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
RXC  
DTR  
RXC 17  
18  
19  
DTR 20  
21  
22  
23  
XTXC  
XTXC 24  
25  
99-16332  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
C-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
" Procedure  
To configure an external modem:  
1. Disconnect the asynchronous terminal from the standard cable. See  
page C-4 for an illustration of the COM Port connection.  
2. Reconnect the crossover cable to the external modem.  
3. Enable auto-answer on your modem, and configure it to use the following  
LSD, DSR, CTS, RTS, and DTR control leads.  
See the table below for AT D0 command strings. Use the following command  
string:  
AT &C0 &D2 &S0 &R1 \D0 S0=1  
AT Command String  
To configure the modem to . . .  
Force LSD on.  
&C0  
&D2  
&S0  
&R1  
\D0  
Drop the connection when the unit drops DTR.  
Force DSR on.  
Ignore RTS.  
Force CTS on.  
S0=1  
Automatically answer incoming calls.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
User and Network Data Port Connectors  
(Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
The following table provides the pin assignments for the EIA-530-A connector to  
the DTE or NTU.  
Circuit  
Mnemonic  
25-Pin  
Pin #  
Signal  
ITU #  
Direction  
Shield  
1
Transmit Data (TXD)  
BA  
103  
To DCE  
2 (A)  
14 (B)  
Received Data (RXD)  
Request to Send (RTS)  
Clear to Send (CTS)  
BB  
CA  
CB  
CC  
104  
105  
106  
107  
102A  
109  
113  
114  
115  
From DCE  
To DCE  
3 (A)  
16 (B)  
4 (A)  
19 (B)  
From DCE  
From DCE  
5 (A)  
13 (B)  
Data Set (or DCE) Ready  
(DSR)  
6
Signal Ground/Common (SG) AB  
To/From  
DCE  
7
Received Line Signal Detector CF  
(RLSD or LSD)  
From DCE  
8 (A)  
10 (B)  
Transmit Signal Element  
Timing (TXC – DTE Source)  
DA  
DB  
DD  
To DCE  
11 (B)  
24 (A)  
Transmit Signal Element  
Timing (TXC – DCE Source)  
From DCE  
From DCE  
12 (B)  
15 (A)  
Received Signal Element  
Timing (RXC – DCE Source)  
17 (A)  
9 (B)  
Local Loopback (LL)  
LL  
141  
To DCE  
To DCE  
18  
20  
Data Terminal (or DTE)  
Ready (DTR)  
CD  
108/1, /2  
Test Mode Indicator (TM)  
TM  
142  
From DCE  
25  
NOTE:  
The user data port has a DCE personality, while the network data port has a  
DTE personality.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
C-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
X.21 Network Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
This cable is used to connect the network data port to an NTU with an X.21  
interface. It is a 25-position EIA-530A-to-15-pin X.21 (DB25-to-X.21) cable.  
This cable (Part No. 035-0384-1031) is part of the X.21 Cable Kit (Feature No.  
9008-F1-521).  
99-16303  
The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25-to-X.21 network  
cable.  
25-Pin  
Socket  
Pin #  
15-Pin  
Plug  
Pin #  
Signal  
ITU #  
Direction  
Transmit Data (TXD)  
103  
2 (A)  
14 (B)  
To DCE  
2 (A)  
9 (B)  
Received Data (RXD)  
104  
105  
3 (A)  
16 (B)  
From DCE  
To DCE  
4 (A)  
11 ( B )  
Request to Send (RTS)  
4 (A)  
3 (A)  
19 (B)  
10 (B)  
Signal Ground/Common (SG)  
102  
109  
7
8
Data Channel Received Line  
8 (A)  
From DCE  
5 (A)  
Signal Detector (RLSD or LSD)  
10 (B)  
12 (B)  
Transmit Signal Element/  
Terminal Timing (TT) —  
DTE Source  
113  
115  
24 (A)  
11 ( B)  
To DCE  
7 (A)  
14 (B)  
Received Signal Element Timing  
(RXC) — DCE Source  
17 (A)  
4 (B)  
From DCE  
13 (A)  
3 (B)  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
X.21 DTE Adapter Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
This adapter is used to connect the user data port to a DTE with an X.21 cable.  
It is a 25-pin EIA-530A-to-15-pin X.21 (DB25-to-X.21) adapter cable.  
This cable (Part No. 035-0302-0131) is part of the X.21 Cable Kit (Feature  
No. 9008-F1-521).  
98-15883  
The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25-to-X.21 adapter  
cable.  
25-Pin  
Plug  
Pin #  
15-Pin  
Socket  
Pin #  
Signal  
ITU #  
Direction  
Transmit Data (TXD)  
103  
2 (A)  
14 (B)  
To DCE  
2 (A)  
9 (B)  
Received Data (RXD)  
104  
115  
105  
109  
113  
3 (A)  
16 (B)  
From DCE  
From DCE  
To DCE  
4 (A)  
11 ( B )  
Received Signal Element Timing  
(RXC) — DCE Source  
17 (A)  
9 (B)  
6 (A)  
13 (B)  
Request to Send (RTS)  
4 (A)  
19 (B)  
3 (A)  
10 (B)  
Data Channel Received Line  
Signal Detector (RLSD or LSD)  
8 (A)  
10 (B)  
From DCE  
To DCE  
5 (A)  
12 (B)  
Transmit Signal Element/  
Terminal Timing (TT) —  
DTE Source  
24 (A)  
11 ( B)  
7 (A)  
14 (B)  
Signal Ground/Common (SG)  
102  
7
8
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
C-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
V.35 Network Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
This cable is used to connect the network data port to an NTU with a V.35  
interface. It is a 25-position EIA-530A-to-34-pin V.35 (DB25-to-V.35) cable.  
This cable (Part No. 035-0383-1031) is part of the V.35 Cable Kit  
(Feature No. 9008-F1-522).  
99-16302  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
C-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25-to-V.35 network  
cable.  
25-Pin  
Socket  
Pin #  
34-Pin  
Plug  
Pin #  
Signal  
ITU #  
Direction  
Transmit Data (TXD)  
103  
2 (A)  
14 (B)  
To DCE  
P (A)  
S (B)  
Received Data (RXD)  
104  
114  
115  
113  
3 (A)  
16 (B)  
From DCE  
From DCE  
From DCE  
To DCE  
R (A)  
T (B)  
Transmit Signal Element Timing  
(TXC) — DCE Source  
15 (A)  
12 (B)  
Y (A)  
AA (B)  
Received Signal Element Timing  
(RXC) — DCE Source  
17 (A)  
9 (B)  
V (A)  
X (B)  
Transmit Signal Element/  
Terminal Timing (TT) —  
DTE Source  
24 (A)  
11 ( B)  
U (A)  
W (B)  
Request to Send (RTS)  
Clear to Send (CTS)  
105  
106  
4
5
To DCE  
C
D
H
From DCE  
To DCE  
Data Terminal (or DTE) Ready  
(DTR)  
108/1, /2 20  
Data Channel Received Line  
109  
8
From DCE  
F
Signal Detector (RLSD or LSD)  
Loopback/Maintenance (RL)  
Local Loopback (LL)  
140  
141  
142  
107  
102  
21  
18  
25  
6
To DCE  
To DCE  
From DCE  
From DCE  
N
L
Test Mode Indicator (TM)  
Data Set (or DCE) Ready (DSR)  
Signal Ground/Common (SG)  
NN  
E
7, 23  
B
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
C-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
V.35 DTE Adapter (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
This adapter is used to connect the user data port to a DTE with an V.35 cable.  
It is a 25-pin EIA-530A-to-34-position V.35 (DB25-to-V.35) adapter.  
This adapter (Part No. 002-0095-0031) is part of the V.35 Cable Kit  
(Feature No. 9008-F1-522).  
99-16294  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
C-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25-to-V.35 adapter.  
25-Pin  
Plug  
Pin #  
34-Pin  
Socket  
Pin #  
Signal  
ITU #  
Direction  
Shield  
1
A
Transmit Data (TXD)  
103  
2 (A)  
14 (B)  
To DCE  
P (A)  
S (B)  
Received Data (RXD)  
104  
114  
115  
3 (A)  
16 (B)  
From DCE  
From DCE  
From DCE  
R (A)  
T (B)  
Transmit Signal Element Timing  
(TXC) — DCE Source  
15 (A)  
12 (B)  
Y (A)  
AA (B)  
Received Signal Element Timing  
(RXC) — DCE Source  
17 (A)  
9 (B)  
V (A)  
X (B)  
Request to Send (RTS)  
Clear to Send (CTS)  
105  
106  
4
5
To DCE  
C
D
H
From DCE  
To DCE  
Data Terminal (or DTE) Ready  
(DTR)  
108/1, /2 20  
Data Channel Received Line  
109  
8
From DCE  
F
Signal Detector (RLSD or LSD)  
Data Set (or DCE) Ready (DSR)  
Signal Ground/Common (SG)  
Loopback/Maintenance (RL)  
Local Loopback (LL)  
107  
102  
140  
141  
102  
113  
6
From DCE  
E
B
N
L
7
21  
18  
23  
To DCE  
To DCE  
Signal Ground/Common (SG)  
B
Transmit Signal Element/  
Terminal Timing (TT) —  
DTE Source  
24 (A)  
11 ( B)  
To DCE  
U (A)  
W (B)  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
C-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
EIA-530-A Straight-through Cable (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
A standard straight-through cable (Feature No. 9008-F1-523) is used to connect  
the network data port to the NTU or the user data port to a DTE when the Port  
Type is E530 (EIA-530-A). It is a 25-pin EIA-530A-to-25-pin EIA-530-A  
(DB25-to-DB25) cable.  
99-16304  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
C-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25-to-DB25  
straight-through cable.  
25-Pin  
Plug  
Pin #  
25-Pin  
Socket  
Pin #  
Signal  
ITU #  
Direction  
Shield  
1
1
Transmit Data (TXD)  
103  
2 (A)  
14 (B)  
To DCE  
2 (A)  
14 (B)  
Received Data (RXD)  
104  
3 (A)  
16 (B)  
From DCE  
3 (A)  
16 (B)  
Request to Send (RTS)  
Clear to Send (CTS)  
105  
106  
107  
4, 19  
5, 13  
6
To DCE  
4, 19  
5, 13  
6
From DCE  
From DCE  
To DCE  
Data Set (or DCE) Ready (DSR)  
Data Terminal (or DTE) Ready  
(DTR)  
108/1, /2 20  
20  
Signal Ground/Common (SG)  
102  
109  
7
7
Data Channel Received Line  
8, 10  
From DCE  
8, 10  
Signal Detector (RLSD or LSD)  
Transmit Signal Element Timing  
(TXC) — DCE Source  
114  
115  
15 (A)  
12 (B)  
From DCE  
From DCE  
15 (A)  
12 (B)  
Received Signal Element Timing  
(RXC) — DCE Source  
17 (A)  
9 (B)  
17 (A)  
9 (B)  
Local Loopback (LL)  
141  
140  
113  
18  
21  
To DCE  
To DCE  
To DCE  
18  
21  
Loopback/Maintenance (RL)  
Transmit Signal Element/  
Terminal Timing (TT) —  
DTE Source  
24 (A)  
11 ( B)  
24 (A)  
11 ( B)  
Test Mode Indicator (TM)  
142  
25  
From DCE  
25  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
C-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
EIA-612/613 HSSI Connectors (Model 9820-45M)  
The 50-pin HSSI connectors on the Model 9820-45M use standard EIA-612/613  
signaling.  
Pin #  
Pin #  
(Positive (Negative  
Signal  
ITU #  
102  
115  
Direction  
Side)  
1
Side)  
26  
27  
28  
29  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
38  
44  
49  
50  
Signal Ground (SG)  
Receive Timing (RT)  
DCE Available (CA)  
Receive Data (RD)  
Send Timing (ST)  
Signal Ground (SG)  
DTE Available (TA)  
Terminal Timing (TT)  
Loopback Circuit A (LA)  
Send Data (SD)  
2
From DCE  
From DCE  
From DCE  
From DCE  
107  
104  
114  
3
4
6
102  
108/2  
113  
7
8
To DCE  
To DCE  
To DCE  
To DCE  
9
143  
103  
102  
102  
142  
102  
10  
11  
13  
19  
24  
25  
Signal Ground (SG)  
Signal Ground (SG)  
Test Mode (TM)  
From DCE  
SIgnal Ground (SG)  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
C-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
LAN Connector (Model 9820-45M)  
The LAN connector on the Model 9820-45M uses a standard IEEE 802.3 8-pin  
modular jack.  
Signal  
Pin #  
Direction  
Transmit Data (TD) +  
Transmit Data (TD) –  
Receive Data (RD) +  
Not Connected  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Out  
Out  
In  
Not Connected  
Receive Data (RD) –  
Not Connected  
In  
Not Connected  
Modem Connector (Model 9820-45M)  
The MODEM connector on the Model 9820-45M uses a 6-position, 4-contact  
modular jack with the following pin assignments.  
Signal  
Pin #  
Not Connected  
Ring  
1
2
3
4
Tip  
Not Connected  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
C-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Specifications  
D
Table D-1. FrameSaver SLV Unit Technical Specifications (1 of 3)  
Specification  
Criteria  
Approvals –  
Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M  
EMC (Class A)  
Network  
ICE  
FCC Part 15, ICES-003, CISPR22, VCCI  
CTR1, CTR2  
73/23/EEC, 89/336/EEC, 91/263/EEC  
CSA 950, EN 60950, AS 3260  
Safety  
Approvals –  
Model 9820-45M  
EMC (Class A)  
Network (Modem)  
Safety  
FCC Part 15, ICES-003  
FCC Part 68, CS-03  
CSA 950, UL 1950  
Physical Environment  
Operating temperature  
Storage temperature  
Relative humidity  
32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)  
4°F to 158°F (20°C to 70°C)  
5% to 85% (noncondensing)  
Shock and vibration  
Withstands normal shipping and handling  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Technical Specifications  
Table D-1. FrameSaver SLV Unit Technical Specifications (2 of 3)  
Specification  
Criteria  
Weight –  
Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M  
2.6 lbs. (1.2 kg)  
19.0 lbs. (8.4 kg)  
Weight – Model 9820-45M  
Physical Dimension –  
Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
2.9 inches (7.4 cm)  
8.5 inches (21.6 cm)  
12.5 inches (31.8 cm)  
Physical Dimensions –  
Model 9820-45M  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
7 inches (18 cm)  
17.2 inches (44 cm)  
13 inches (33 cm)  
Power –  
Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M  
Input  
100 – 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.7A  
12 Vdc, 2.5A, 1.0A minimum  
Output  
Power – Model 9820-45M  
Input  
120 VAC, 60 Hz  
Power Consumption and Dissipation 4.8 watts, 100mA at 100 Vac  
- Models 9820 and 9820-2M  
Result: 16.38 Btu per hour  
5.0 watts, 90mA at 120 Vac  
Result: 17.06 Btu per hour  
5.6 watts, 60mA at 240 Vac  
Result: 19.11 Btu per hour  
Power Consumption and Dissipation 9.7 watts, 186mA at 100 Vac  
- Model 9820-8M  
Result: 33.10 Btu per hour  
9.9 watts, 164mA at 120 Vac  
Result: 33.78 Btu per hour  
10.8 watts, 110mA at 240 Vac  
Result: 36.85 Btu per hour  
Power Consumption and Dissipation 74.1 Watts, 1.06 A at 120 Vac  
- Model 9820-45M Result: 252.8 Btu per hour  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
D-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Specifications  
Table D-1. FrameSaver SLV Unit Technical Specifications (3 of 3)  
Specification  
Criteria  
COM Port (9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
DB25 connector  
Data rates  
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, and  
115.2 kbps  
Terminal Port (9820-45M)  
DB25 connector  
Data rates  
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4 kbps  
LAN Port  
8-pin modular socket  
Specifications  
Receive: Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802.3  
Transmit: Ethernet Version 2  
Data rates  
10 or 100 Mbps  
Network Data Port  
Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M:  
25-position (DB25) subminiature connector  
Selectable EIA-530, V.35, X.21  
Model 9820-45M:  
HSSI (EIA-613)  
Model 9820:  
Data rates  
56/64 kbps and 112/128 kbps (auto-detected)  
Model 9820-2M:  
562048 kbps in 56/64 kbps increments  
(auto-detected)  
Model 9820-8M:  
10248192 kbps in 8 kbps increments  
(auto-detected)  
Model 9820-45M:  
044.21 kbps in 8 kbps increments  
(auto-detected)  
User Data Port  
Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M:  
25-position (DB25) subminiature connector  
Selectable EIA-530-A, V.35, X.21  
Model 9820-45M:  
HSSI (EIA-613)  
Automatically set to same values as the  
Network interface  
Data rates  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Technical Specifications  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
D-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Equipment List  
E
Equipment  
See page E-3 for cables you can order.  
Model/Feature  
Number  
Description  
FrameSaver SLV In-Line Units  
1
FrameSaver SLV 9820 In-Line unit (128 Kbps) for up to 16 PVCs  
Includes Standalone Housing, Universal 100240 VAC  
Power Supply, Power Cord, Installation Instructions, and  
Quick Reference.  
9820-A2-443-nnn  
1
FrameSaver SLV 9820-2M In-Line unit (2 Mbps) for  
up to 120 PVCs  
9820-A2-444-nnn  
Includes Standalone Housing, Universal 100240 VAC  
Power Supply, Power Cord, Installation Instructions, and  
Quick Reference.  
1
FrameSaver SLV 9820-8M In-Line unit (8 Mbps) for  
up to 250 PVCs  
9820-A2-445-nnn  
Includes Standalone Housing, Universal 100240 VAC  
Power Supply, Power Cord, Installation Instructions, and  
Quick Reference.  
FrameSaver SLV 9820-45M In-Line unit (45 Mbps) for  
up to 512 PVCs  
9820-A2-429  
Includes Rack-Mount Housing, Redundant Power Supplies,  
Power Cords, Network Cable, Installation Instructions, and  
Quick Reference.  
User Manual  
FrameSaver SLV, Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M, and  
9820-45M, User’s Guide (Paper Manual)  
9820-A2-GB20  
1
Model number may include the country code nnn. Contact your Paradyne sales office.  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Equipment List  
Model/Feature  
Number  
Description  
Power Supply  
100 240 VAC Power Supply (Models 9820, 9820-2M, 9820-8M)  
120 VAC Power Module (Model 9820-45M)  
NMS Products  
9001-F1-040  
9580-F1-020  
OpenLane Enterprise  
7805-D1-001  
7805-D1-003  
9180  
OpenLane Workgroup  
NetScout Manager Plus – For UNIX or Windows NT  
NetScout Server – For UNIX or Windows NT  
NetScout WebCast – For UNIX or Windows NT  
Optional Features  
9190  
9155  
Wall Mounting Kit for 1-Slot Housing  
Shelf Mounting Kit for 1-Slot Housings  
9001-F1-891  
9001-F1-894  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
E-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Equipment List  
Cables  
This table lists cables you can order.  
Description  
Part Number  
Feature Number  
LAN Adapter,  
002-0069-0031  
3100-F1-920  
DB25 plug-to-8-position modular receptacle  
COM Port-to-LAN Adapter Cable  
(14 ft /4.3 m)  
035-0315-1431  
3100-F2-910  
9008-F1-514  
9008-F1-521  
50-position to 50-position, 0.5-inch straight 035-0399-1031  
exit connector HSSI cable (10 ft/3 m)  
X.21 Cable Kit, which includes a:  
X.21 Network Cable (10 ft/3 m)  
035-0384-1031  
035-0302-0131  
X.21 DTE Adapter Cable,  
EIA-530-A-to-X.21 (1 ft /.3 m)  
V.35 Cable Kit, which includes a:  
V.35 Network Cable (10 ft/3 m)  
V.35 DTE Adapter, EIA-530-A-to-V.35  
9008-F1-522  
035-0383-1031  
002-0095-0031  
EIA-530 Straight-Through Cable,  
DB25-to-DB25 (10 ft/3 m)  
035-0385-1031  
9008-F1-523  
9580-F1-570  
50-position, 0.5-inch straight exit connector 035-0375-0031  
to MS34 connector (HSSI to V.35) adapter  
cable (1 ft/0.3 m)  
Ethernet 10BaseT cable with 8-pin modular 035-0349-1431  
connectors (14 ft/4.3 m)  
Power Cable (6 ft/1.8 m; North America)  
125-0057-0031  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Equipment List  
This page intentionally left blank.  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
E-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Numbers  
A
Access  
B
Back-to-Back  
security, 2-1  
adding manually, 10-11  
C
Call Retry, 4-48  
Alternate  
changing  
Character  
Dial-Out Directory, 4-49  
Alternate Destination  
Clearing  
Clock  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
IN-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
connector, C-3  
creating  
CTS  
Concord Network Health, compatibility, 11-1  
Configuration  
D
Data  
DB25, COM Port, connector, C-3  
DB25-to-DB25  
configuring  
DLCI records manually, 4-26  
DB25-to-V.35  
Connectivity, setting up service provider, 4-11  
connectivity, 8-19  
DTE adapter, C-11, C-12  
Control  
DB25-to-X.21  
Control Leads  
DBM  
controlling  
Delete key, 2-6  
copyrights, A  
Default IP, 4-34  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
IN-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Device  
downloading  
Dial-In Access  
DTE  
Dial-Out  
Directory, 4-49  
Disconnect Time  
DTR  
E
Telnet session inactivity, 4-42  
Discovery  
displaying  
EIA-530-A  
connector, C-6  
to-V.35  
DTE adapter, C-11  
to-X.21  
monitoring user history, 10-16  
Number, 4-26  
Priority, 4-28  
Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI),  
Enter (Return) key, 2-6  
domains and groups  
Esc key, 2-6  
capability, 1-5  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
IN-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Ethernet port  
G
General  
even parity, 4-53  
Event Log, Traps, 6-38  
External  
glossary, x  
Modem  
H
F
history  
fan assembly  
I
field is blank/empty, 2-9  
file transfer, 7-2  
Inactivity Timeout, 4-42  
Frame Relay  
Discovery, 4-7  
indicator LEDs, power supply, 6-10  
installing  
Inverse ARP, 1-4  
front panel assembly  
IP  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
IN-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
LMI  
and PVC availability, 1-4  
Behavior, 4-14  
NMS number, 4-44, 4-45  
packet utility, 8-5  
K
keys  
L
local  
latency, 1-4  
Login  
power supply, 6-10  
lights, power supply, 6-10  
limiting  
Loopback  
Link  
LOS  
linkUp and linkDown  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
IN-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
M
Management  
monitoring  
Multiplexed  
menu  
N
N1, LMI Status Enquiry, 4-15, 4-24  
messages  
Community, 4-40  
NetOnly, 4-7  
NetScout  
MIB  
Network  
data port connector, C-6  
Mode  
latency, 1-4  
model number, 2-5  
modem  
Modem port  
NMS  
Monitor  
SNMP security, options, 4-44  
Node  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
IN-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Port  
Number of  
O
odd parity, 4-53  
OID  
OpenLane  
Outbound Management Priority, 4-28  
Primary Destination  
Primary Link RIP, 4-38  
Proprietary, RIP, 4-38, 4-56  
Protocol  
P
packet capture  
utility, 8-5  
Parity, 4-53  
patents, A  
pattern, send/monitor, 8-18  
PVC  
Performance Wizard, copying directory, 10-2  
physical  
availability, 1-4  
pin assignments  
COM Port, EIA-232 connector, C-3  
EIA-530-A connector, C-6  
V.35 DTE adapter, C-12  
total number, 1-4  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
IN-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Q
S
screen  
R
selecting  
resetting  
Self-Test  
Return (Enter) key, 2-6  
serial number, NAM, 6-2  
Service, A  
service level  
verification  
right arrow key, 2-6  
verifier (SLV), 1-1  
service provider, management, control/connectivity,  
RMON  
Session  
Specific Traps, B-14  
router, setting up to receive RIP, 4-11  
setting  
setting up  
service provider connectivity, 4-11  
so router can receive RIP, 4-11  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
IN-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
SLV  
Status  
DLCI Down on Timeout, 4-16  
SNMP  
suggestions, user documentation, A  
switching  
System  
software  
Source  
Spacebar, 2-6  
speed  
T
Tab key, 2-6  
Standard_out RIP, 1-4  
standards compliance for SNMP Traps, B-6  
starting  
Telnet  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
IN-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Terminal port  
connector, C-3  
Test  
through PVC connections, total number, 1-4  
U
Timeout  
upload/download capability, 1-5  
user data port  
trademarks, A  
connector, C-6  
Training, A  
Transmit Clock  
user history  
user interface  
Trap  
Traps  
COM port, set up external modem for trap dial-out,  
user-defined history, 10-13  
June 2000  
9820-A2-GB20-20  
IN-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
V
W
warmStart  
events, General Traps, 4-46  
warranty, A  
Web-site  
virtual path or channel identifier, 1-5  
glossary, x  
X
9820-A2-GB20-20  
June 2000  
IN-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Ventilation Hood 09 824 260 User Manual
Miele Washer 09 848 440 User Manual
Miller Electric Welder SRH 503 User Manual
NEC Projector WT600 User Manual
Nike Heart Rate Monitor HRM SDM User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTL15951 User Manual
Nortel Networks Server 555 7101 226 User Manual
Omnimount TV Mount OL80F User Manual
Panasonic IP Phone BB GT1540E User Manual
Patton electronic Marine Battery 222N9 User Manual